HK1240070B - Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system - Google Patents

Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
HK1240070B
HK1240070B HK17113683.6A HK17113683A HK1240070B HK 1240070 B HK1240070 B HK 1240070B HK 17113683 A HK17113683 A HK 17113683A HK 1240070 B HK1240070 B HK 1240070B
Authority
HK
Hong Kong
Prior art keywords
bed
actuator
loading
control
support frame
Prior art date
Application number
HK17113683.6A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
HK1240070A1 (en
Inventor
科林.Q.布利肯斯德弗
布莱恩.M.马吉尔
蒂莫西.R.韦尔斯
普丽蒂.萨尔
德里克.C.罗宾逊
尼古拉斯.V.瓦连丁诺
迈克尔.D.克拉克
Original Assignee
费诺-华盛顿公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 费诺-华盛顿公司 filed Critical 费诺-华盛顿公司
Publication of HK1240070A1 publication Critical patent/HK1240070A1/en
Publication of HK1240070B publication Critical patent/HK1240070B/en

Links

Description

具有自动卧床控制系统的电动救护车卧床Electric ambulance bed rest with automatic bed rest control system

技术领域Technical Field

本发明大体上涉及急救患者运输物,并且具体地说涉及一种具有自动卧床控制系统的电动救护车卧床。The present invention relates generally to emergency patient transports and, more particularly, to an electric ambulance bed with an automatic bed control system.

背景技术Background Art

当今在使用多种急救患者运输物。这些急救患者运输物可以设计成将肥胖症治疗患者运输并装载到救护车中。例如,美国俄亥俄州的Ferno-Washington,Inc.ofWilmington制造的卧床是这样一种患者运输物,它具体实施为手动致动的卧床,该卧床可以为大约700磅(约317.5kg)的负载提供稳定性和支撑。卧床包括患者支撑部分,附接到带轮起落架。带轮起落架包括X框架几何形状,该X框架几何形状可以在九种可选位置之间转变。这种卧床设计的一个已认识到的优点是X框架在所有可选位置都能提供极小的挠曲和低重心。这种卧床设计的另一个已认识到的优点是所述可选位置可以提供更好的杠杆作用用于手动地抬升和装载肥胖症治疗患者。A variety of emergency patient transports are in use today. These emergency patient transports can be designed to transport and load bariatric patients into ambulances. For example, the bed manufactured by Ferno-Washington, Inc. of Wilmington, Ohio, USA, is a patient transport that is embodied as a manually actuated bed that can provide stability and support for a load of approximately 700 pounds (approximately 317.5 kg). The bed includes a patient support portion attached to a wheeled landing gear. The wheeled landing gear includes an X-frame geometry that can be transformed between nine optional positions. A recognized advantage of this bed design is that the X-frame can provide minimal flexure and a low center of gravity in all optional positions. Another recognized advantage of this bed design is that the optional positions can provide better leverage for manually lifting and loading bariatric patients.

针对肥胖症治疗患者设计的急救患者运输物的另一个示例是Ferno-Washington,Inc制造的POWERFlexx+电动卧床。POWERFlexx+电动卧床包括电池供电的致动器,该致动器可以提供足以抬升大约700磅(大约317.5kg)的负载的充分动力。这种卧床设计的一个已认识到的优点是卧床可以将肥胖症治疗患者从低位置抬升到较高位置,即,操作者需要抬升患者的情况可能减少。Another example of an emergency patient transport designed for bariatric patients is the POWERFlexx+ electric recliner manufactured by Ferno-Washington, Inc. The POWERFlexx+ electric recliner includes a battery-powered actuator that can provide sufficient power to lift a load of approximately 700 pounds (approximately 317.5 kg). One recognized advantage of this recliner design is that the recliner can lift a bariatric patient from a low position to a higher position, i.e., the operator may need to lift the patient less frequently.

另外一种急救患者运输物是多用途滚入式急救卧床,该卧床具有患者支撑担架,其可移除地附接到带轮起落架或运输物。患者支撑担架在从运输物上移除以用于单独使用时,可以在所包含的一组转轮上水平地四处穿梭移动。这种卧床设计的一个已认识到的优点是担架可以分开滚动到诸如面包车、货车、组合式救护车、飞机或直升机之类的急救运输工具中,其中空间和减少的重量是额外的优点。这种卧床设计的另一个优点是分开的担架可以更容易在不平坦的地形上运载,和从使用完整的卧床无法运输患者的位置运载出来。这些卧床的示例可以参照美国专利No.4,037,871、No.4,921,295以及国际公开No.WO01701611。Another type of emergency patient transport is a multi-purpose roll-in emergency bed, which has a patient support stretcher that is removably attached to a wheeled landing gear or transport. When the patient support stretcher is removed from the transport for separate use, it can be moved horizontally around on a set of included wheels. A recognized advantage of this bed design is that the stretcher can be rolled separately into an emergency transport such as a van, truck, modular ambulance, airplane, or helicopter, where space and reduced weight are additional advantages. Another advantage of this bed design is that the separate stretcher can be more easily carried on uneven terrain and out of locations where the patient cannot be transported using a complete bed. Examples of these beds can be found in U.S. Patents No. 4,037,871, No. 4,921,295, and International Publication No. WO01701611.

虽然前述急救患者运输物对于其预期用途总体上是足够的,但是它们不是在所有方面都令人满意。例如,将前述急救患者运输物装载到救护车中的装载过程需要至少一个操作人员在相应装载过程的一部分支撑卧床的负载。While the aforementioned emergency patient transports are generally adequate for their intended use, they are not satisfactory in all respects. For example, the loading process of the aforementioned emergency patient transports into an ambulance requires at least one operator to support the bed's load during a portion of the loading process.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

本文所述的实施例涉及一种具有自动卧床控制系统的电动救护车卧床,它为多用途滚入式急救卧床设计提供改进的通用性,方法是通过在经由滚动被装载到诸如救护车、货车、面包车、飞行器和直升机之类的各种类型的急救运输工具中的同时,提供对卧床重量的改进的管理、改进的重量、和/或使得在任何卧床高度更容易装载。The embodiments described herein relate to an electric ambulance cot with an automatic cot control system that provides improved versatility for a multi-use roll-in emergency cot design by providing improved management of cot weight, improved weight, and/or easier loading at any cot height while being rolled into various types of emergency transport vehicles such as ambulances, trucks, vans, aircraft, and helicopters.

通过以下详细描述配合附图将更全面地理解本发明的实施例提供的这些和另外的特征。These and other features provided by embodiments of the present invention will be more fully understood from the following detailed description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

以下对本发明的具体实施例的详细描述当配合以下附图时可以最好地理解,附图中用类似的参考标号指示类似的结构并且其中:The following detailed description of specific embodiments of the present invention may be best understood when taken in conjunction with the following drawings, in which like reference numerals designate like structures, and in which:

图1是描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的透视图;1 is a perspective view depicting a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图2是描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例并且示出剖面线A-A的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的俯视图;FIG2 is a top view depicting a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein and showing section line A-A;

图3是描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的侧视图;3 is a side view depicting a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图4A至图4C是描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的升高和/或降低序列的侧视图;4A-4C are side views depicting a raising and/or lowering sequence of a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图5A至图5E是描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的装载和/或卸载序列的侧视图;5A-5E are side views depicting a loading and/or unloading sequence of a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图6示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的致动器系统;FIG6 schematically depicts an actuator system for a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图6A至图6D示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的液压回路;6A-6D schematically depict a hydraulic circuit according to one or more embodiments described herein for use with a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图7示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的具有电力系统的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床;FIG7 schematically depicts a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot with an electric power system according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图8示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的后端的一部分,为了方便图示已被切开;FIG8 schematically depicts a portion of a rear end of a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot according to one or more embodiments described herein, which has been cut away for ease of illustration;

图9示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的转轮组合件;FIG9 schematically depicts a rotating wheel assembly for use with a roll-in self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图10示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的转轮组合件;FIG10 schematically depicts a rotating wheel assembly for use with a roll-in self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图11示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的上行手扶电梯功能;FIG11 schematically depicts an upward escalator function for use with a roll-in self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图12示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的下行手扶电梯功能;FIG12 schematically depicts a down-stairs escalator function for use with a roll-in self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图13示意性地描绘用于执行根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的手扶电梯功能的方法;FIG13 schematically depicts a method for performing an escalator function for use with a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图14A示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的处在坐式装载或椅子位置的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的透视图;FIG14A schematically depicts a perspective view of a roll-in, self-actuating, electric ambulance cot in a seated stowage or chair position according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图14B示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的处在坐式装载或椅子位置的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的侧视图;14B schematically depicts a side view of a roll-in, self-actuating, electric ambulance cot in a seated stowage or chair position according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图15示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床使用的卧床控制系统;FIG15 schematically depicts a bed control system for use with a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance bed according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图16是示出由根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图15的卧床控制系统的电机控制器发送的通信消息的图;16 is a diagram illustrating communication messages sent by a motor controller of the bed control system of FIG. 15 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图17是示出由根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图15的卧床控制系统的电池控制器发送的通信消息的图;17 is a diagram illustrating communication messages sent by the battery controller of the bed control system of FIG. 15 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图18是由示出根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图15的卧床控制系统的图形用户界面控制器发送的通信消息的图;18 is a diagram illustrating communication messages sent by a graphical user interface controller of the bed control system of FIG. 15 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图19示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图15的卧床控制系统的电机控制器;FIG19 schematically depicts a motor controller of the bed control system of FIG15 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图20是根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图15的卧床控制系统自动检验的条件和自动执行的操作的程序流程图;FIG20 is a flowchart illustrating conditions automatically checked and operations automatically performed by the bed rest control system of FIG15 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图21是示出根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的图19的卧床控制系统的电机控制器执行的输入代码信号相关和电机状态选择的图;21 is a diagram illustrating input code signal correlation and motor state selection performed by the motor controller of the bed control system of FIG. 19 according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图22示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的在第一位置中的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的枢轴盘沿着图3中的剖面线A-A获得的横截面视图;FIG22 schematically depicts a cross-sectional view taken along section line A-A in FIG3 of a pivot plate of a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot in a first position according to one or more embodiments described herein;

图23示意性地描绘根据本文所描述的一个或多个实施例的在第二位置中的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的枢轴盘沿着图3中的剖面线A-A获得的横截面视图;以及FIG23 schematically depicts a cross-sectional view of the pivot plate of the roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot in a second position, taken along section line A-A in FIG3 , according to one or more embodiments described herein; and

图24A至图24D是一些图形用户界面的绘图,每个图形用户界面示出表示滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床的不同选定操作模式的图像。24A-24D are drawings of graphical user interfaces, each showing an image representing a different selected operating mode of a roll-in, self-actuating electric ambulance cot.

附图中所阐述的实施例的性质是说明性的,并且并不希望限制本文所述的实施例。此外,考虑到详细描述将更全面地明白和理解附图和实施例的各个特征。The embodiments illustrated in the drawings are illustrative in nature and are not intended to limit the embodiments described herein. Furthermore, consideration of the detailed description will provide a more complete appreciation and understanding of the various features of the drawings and embodiments.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

参看图1,图中示出了用于在上面运输患者并将患者装载到急救运输工具中的滚入式自致动电动救护车卧床10。卧床10包括支撑框架12,支撑框架12包括前端17和后端19。如本文所使用,前端17与术语“装载端”即卧床10的首先被装载到装载表面上的末端同义。相反,如本文所使用,后端19是卧床10的最后被装载到装载表面上的末端,并且与术语“控制端”同义,控制端是如本文所论述提供多个操作人员控件的末端。另外应注意,当卧床10上装载着患者时,患者的头可以定向成最靠近前端17,并且患者的脚可以定向成最靠近后端19。因此,词组“头端”可以与词组“前端”互换使用,并且词组“脚端”可以与词组“后端”互换使用。此外,应注意,词组“前端”和“后端”是可互换的。因此,虽然出于清楚起见在通篇中一致地使用这些词组,但是本文所述的实施例可以换过来使用,而并不脱离本发明的范围。大体而言,如本文所使用,术语“患者”是指任何活着的东西或者原先活着的东西,诸如例如人、动物、尸体等等。Referring to FIG. 1 , a roll-in, self-actuating, electric ambulance cot 10 is shown for transporting and loading a patient into an emergency transport. The cot 10 includes a support frame 12 having a front end 17 and a rear end 19. As used herein, the front end 17 is synonymous with the term "loading end," i.e., the end of the cot 10 that is first loaded onto a loading surface. Conversely, the rear end 19, as used herein, is the end of the cot 10 that is last loaded onto a loading surface and is synonymous with the term "control end," which is the end that provides multiple operator controls, as discussed herein. It should also be noted that when a patient is loaded on the cot 10, the patient's head can be oriented closest to the front end 17, and the patient's feet can be oriented closest to the rear end 19. Thus, the phrase "head end" can be used interchangeably with the phrase "front end," and the phrase "foot end" can be used interchangeably with the phrase "rear end." Furthermore, it should be noted that the phrases "front end" and "rear end" are interchangeable. Therefore, although these phrases are used consistently throughout for clarity, the embodiments described herein may be used interchangeably without departing from the scope of the invention. Generally speaking, as used herein, the term "patient" refers to any living or formerly living thing, such as, for example, a human, an animal, a cadaver, etc.

参看图2,前端17和/或后端19可以是可伸缩的。在一个实施例中,前端17可以延伸和/或缩回(图2中总体上通过箭头217表示)。在另一实施例中,后端19可以延伸和/或缩回(图2中总体上通过箭头219表示)。因此,前端17与后端19之间的总长度可以增加和/或减小以适应患者的各种体型。2 , front end 17 and/or rear end 19 can be retractable. In one embodiment, front end 17 can be extended and/or retracted (generally represented by arrow 217 in FIG. 2 ). In another embodiment, rear end 19 can be extended and/or retracted (generally represented by arrow 219 in FIG. 2 ). Thus, the overall length between front end 17 and rear end 19 can be increased and/or decreased to accommodate various patient sizes.

参照图1和图2,支撑框架12可包括一对基本上平行的侧面部件15,在前端17与后端19之间延伸。可以设想侧面部件15的各种结构。在一个实施例中,侧面部件15可以是一对间隔开的金属轨道。在另一实施例中,侧面部件15包括底切部分115,底切部分115可以与附件夹具(未描绘)接合。这些附件夹具可以用于将患者护理附件(诸如静脉输液架)可移除地联接至底切部分115。底切部分115可以沿着侧面部件的整个长度设置,以允许附件可移除地夹持到卧床10上的许多不同位置。1 and 2 , the support frame 12 can include a pair of substantially parallel side members 15 extending between a front end 17 and a rear end 19. Various configurations of the side members 15 are contemplated. In one embodiment, the side members 15 can be a pair of spaced-apart metal rails. In another embodiment, the side members 15 include undercut portions 115 that can engage with accessory clamps (not depicted). These accessory clamps can be used to removably couple patient care accessories, such as IV poles, to the undercut portions 115. The undercut portions 115 can be provided along the entire length of the side members to allow accessories to be removably clamped to many different locations on the couch 10.

再次参看图1,卧床10还包括联接到支撑框架12的一对可缩回的并且可延伸的装载端支腿20,以及联接到支撑框架12的一对可缩回的并且可延伸的控制端支腿40。卧床10可包括任何刚性材料,诸如例如金属结构或复合结构。具体地说,支撑框架12、装载端支腿20、控制端支腿40或其组合可包括碳纤维和树脂结构。如本文中更详细地描述,通过延伸装载端支腿20和/或控制端支腿40可以将卧床10升高到多个高度,或者通过缩回装载端支腿20和/或控制端支腿40可以将卧床10降低到多个高度。应注意,诸如“升高”、“降低”、“上方”、“下方”和“高度”的术语在本文中用于表示使用参照物(例如支撑卧床的表面)沿着平行于重力的线测量到的物体之间的距离关系。Referring again to FIG. 1 , the bed 10 also includes a pair of retractable and extendable loading-end legs 20 coupled to the support frame 12, and a pair of retractable and extendable control-end legs 40 coupled to the support frame 12. The bed 10 can comprise any rigid material, such as, for example, a metal structure or a composite structure. Specifically, the support frame 12, the loading-end legs 20, the control-end legs 40, or a combination thereof can comprise a carbon fiber and resin structure. As described in more detail herein, the bed 10 can be raised to a variety of heights by extending the loading-end legs 20 and/or the control-end legs 40, or lowered to a variety of heights by retracting the loading-end legs 20 and/or the control-end legs 40. It should be noted that terms such as "raised," "lowered," "above," "below," and "height" are used herein to refer to distance relationships between objects measured along a line parallel to gravity using a reference object (e.g., a surface supporting the bed).

在具体实施例中,装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40可以各自联接到侧面部件15。如图4A至图5E中所示,当从侧面查看卧床时(具体来说在装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40联接到支撑框架12(例如侧面部件15(图1-至图3))的相应位置处)装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40可以彼此交叉。如图1的实施例中所示,控制端支腿40可以安置在装载端支腿20内侧,即,装载端支腿20的彼此间隔可以比控制端支腿40的彼此间隔更远,使得每个控制端支腿40位于装载端支腿20之间。此外,装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40可以包括前部转轮26和后部转轮46,这些转轮使得卧床10能够滚动。In certain embodiments, the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 can each be coupled to the side members 15. As shown in Figures 4A through 5E, the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 can cross each other when the cot is viewed from the side (specifically, at the respective locations where the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 are coupled to the support frame 12 (e.g., the side members 15 (Figures 1-3))). As shown in the embodiment of Figure 1, the control-end legs 40 can be positioned inboard of the loading-end legs 20, i.e., the loading-end legs 20 can be spaced farther apart from each other than the control-end legs 40, such that each control-end leg 40 is positioned between the loading-end legs 20. Furthermore, the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 can include front wheels 26 and rear wheels 46 that enable the cot 10 to roll.

在一个实施例中,前部转轮26和后部转轮46可以是万向轮(swivel casterwheels)或旋转锁定轮(swivel locked wheels)。当卧床10抬升和/或降低时,前部转轮26和后部转轮46可以被同步以确保卧床10的侧面部件15的平面和转轮26、46的平面基本上平行。In one embodiment, the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 can be swivel caster wheels or swivel locked wheels. When the couch 10 is raised and/or lowered, the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 can be synchronized to ensure that the planes of the side members 15 of the couch 10 and the planes of the wheels 26, 46 are substantially parallel.

参看图1至图3和图6,卧床10还可包括卧床致动系统34,该卧床致动系统34包括被配置成移动装载端支腿20的前部致动器16和被配置成移动控制端支腿40的后部致动器18。卧床致动系统34可包括一个单元(例如集中式电机和泵),该单元被配置成控制前部致动器16和后部致动器18两个元件。例如,卧床致动系统34可包括一个壳体,该壳体具有一个电机,电机能够利用阀门、控制逻辑等等驱动前部致动器16、后部致动器18或这两个元件。替代地,如图1中所描绘,卧床致动系统34可包括分开的单元,被配置成分别控制前部致动器16和后部致动器18。在这个实施例中,前部致动器16和后部致动器18可以各包括分开的壳体,这些壳体具有各个电机以驱动前部致动器16和后部致动器18中的每个元件。1-3 and 6 , the couch 10 may also include a couch actuation system 34 that includes a front actuator 16 configured to move the load-end legs 20 and a rear actuator 18 configured to move the control-end legs 40. The couch actuation system 34 may include a single unit (e.g., a centralized motor and pump) configured to control both the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18. For example, the couch actuation system 34 may include a housing having a single motor that is capable of driving the front actuator 16, the rear actuator 18, or both, using valves, control logic, and the like. Alternatively, as depicted in FIG1 , the couch actuation system 34 may include separate units configured to control the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18, respectively. In this embodiment, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 may each include separate housings having individual motors to drive each element in the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 .

前部致动器16联接到支撑框架12并且配置成致动装载端支腿20并抬升和/或降低卧床10的前端17。此外,后部致动器18联接到支撑框架12,并且配置成致动控制端支腿40并且升高和/或降低卧床10的后端19。卧床10可以通过任何合适的电源供电。例如,卧床10可以包括电池,电池能够供应诸如大约24V标称或大约32V标称的电压用于它的电源。The front actuator 16 is coupled to the support frame 12 and configured to actuate the load-end legs 20 and raise and/or lower the front end 17 of the bed 10. Furthermore, the rear actuator 18 is coupled to the support frame 12 and configured to actuate the control-end legs 40 and raise and/or lower the rear end 19 of the bed 10. The bed 10 can be powered by any suitable power source. For example, the bed 10 can include a battery capable of supplying a voltage, such as approximately 24V nominal or approximately 32V nominal, for its power supply.

前部致动器16和后部致动器18可操作以同时或独立致动装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40。如图4A至图5E中所示,同时和/或独立致动允许将卧床10设置成各种高度。本文所述的致动器可能能够提供大约350磅(大约158.8kg)的动力和大约500磅(大约226.8kg)的静力。此外,前部致动器16和后部致动器18可以通过集中式电机系统或多个独立电机系统操作。The front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 are operable to actuate the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 simultaneously or independently. As shown in Figures 4A to 5E, simultaneous and/or independent actuation allows the sleeper 10 to be set to various heights. The actuators described herein may be capable of providing approximately 350 pounds (approximately 158.8 kg) of power and approximately 500 pounds (approximately 226.8 kg) of static force. Furthermore, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 may be operated by a centralized motor system or multiple independent motor systems.

在图1至图3和图6中示意性地描绘的一个实施例中,前部致动器16和后部致动器18包括用于致动卧床10的液压致动器。在一个实施例中,前部致动器16和后部致动器18是双背负液压致动器(dual piggy back hydraulic actuators),即,前部致动器16和后部致动器18各自形成主从液压回路。主从液压回路包括四个液压汽缸,其具有四个延伸杆,这些延伸杆成对地彼此背负(即,机械联接)。因此,双重背负致动器包括具有第一杆的第一液压汽缸、具有第二杆的第二液压汽缸、具有第三杆的第三液压汽缸和具有第四杆的第四液压汽缸。应注意,虽然本文所述的实施例经常参照包括四个液压汽缸的主从系统,但是本文所述的主从系统液压回路可以包括任何偶数个液压汽缸。In one embodiment schematically depicted in Figures 1 to 3 and 6, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 comprise hydraulic actuators for actuating the bed 10. In one embodiment, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 are dual piggy back hydraulic actuators, that is, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 each form a master-slave hydraulic circuit. The master-slave hydraulic circuit includes four hydraulic cylinders having four extension rods that are piggybacked (i.e., mechanically coupled) to each other in pairs. Thus, the dual piggy back actuator includes a first hydraulic cylinder having a first rod, a second hydraulic cylinder having a second rod, a third hydraulic cylinder having a third rod, and a fourth hydraulic cylinder having a fourth rod. It should be noted that although the embodiments described herein often refer to a master-slave system including four hydraulic cylinders, the master-slave system hydraulic circuit described herein can include any even number of hydraulic cylinders.

参看图6,前部致动器16和后部致动器18各自包括刚性支撑框架180,刚性支撑框架180基本上是“H”形的(即,两个竖直部分通过横向部分连接起来)。刚性支撑框架180包括横向部件182,横向部件182在两个竖直部件184中的每一个竖直部件的大约中间位置联接到两个竖直部件184。泵电机160和流体储集器162联接到横向部件182并且流体连通。在一个实施例中,泵电机160和流体储集器162安置于横向部件182的相对侧上(例如流体储集器162安置在泵电机160上方)。具体地说,泵电机160可以是峰值输出大约1400瓦的刷式双旋电动机。刚性支撑框架180可以包括额外的横向部件或背衬板以提供更多的硬度,并且在致动期间相对于横向部件182抵抗竖直部件184的扭转或横向运动。6 , the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 each include a rigid support frame 180 that is substantially H-shaped (i.e., two vertical sections connected by a transverse section). The rigid support frame 180 includes a transverse member 182 that is coupled to the two vertical members 184 approximately midway between each of the two vertical members 184. The pump motor 160 and the fluid reservoir 162 are coupled to the transverse member 182 and are in fluid communication. In one embodiment, the pump motor 160 and the fluid reservoir 162 are positioned on opposite sides of the transverse member 182 (e.g., the fluid reservoir 162 is positioned above the pump motor 160). Specifically, the pump motor 160 may be a brushed, dual-rotation motor with a peak output of approximately 1400 watts. The rigid support frame 180 may include additional transverse members or backing plates to provide additional rigidity and resist twisting or lateral movement of the vertical members 184 relative to the transverse members 182 during actuation.

每个竖直部件184包括一对背负液压汽缸(即,第一液压汽缸和第二液压汽缸或第三液压汽缸和第四液压汽缸),其中,第一汽缸的杆在第一方向上延伸,第二汽缸的杆在基本上相反的方向上延伸。当汽缸布置成一个主从配置时,竖直部件184中的一个包括上部主汽缸168和下部主汽缸268。竖直部件184中的另一个包括上部从属汽缸169和下部从属汽缸269。应注意,虽然主汽缸168、268背负在一起,并且在基本上相反的方向上延伸杆165、265,但是主汽缸168、268可以位于交替的竖直部件184中和/或在基本上相同的方向上延伸杆165、265。Each vertical member 184 includes a pair of piggyback hydraulic cylinders (i.e., a first hydraulic cylinder and a second hydraulic cylinder or a third hydraulic cylinder and a fourth hydraulic cylinder), wherein the rod of the first cylinder extends in a first direction and the rod of the second cylinder extends in a substantially opposite direction. When the cylinders are arranged in a master-slave configuration, one of the vertical members 184 includes an upper master cylinder 168 and a lower master cylinder 268. The other of the vertical members 184 includes an upper slave cylinder 169 and a lower slave cylinder 269. It should be noted that although the master cylinders 168, 268 are piggyback and extend the rods 165, 265 in substantially opposite directions, the master cylinders 168, 268 can be located in alternate vertical members 184 and/or extend the rods 165, 265 in substantially the same direction.

现在参照图6A至图6D,汽缸壳体122可以包括上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268。上部活塞164可以限制在上部汽缸168内,并且并且配置成当受到液压流体作用时在上部活塞164中行进。上部杆165可以联接到上部活塞164并且随着上部活塞164移动。上部汽缸168可以与上部活塞164的相对侧上的杆延伸流体路径312和杆缩回流体路径322流体连通。因此,当经由杆延伸流体路径312比杆缩回流体路径322向液压流体供应的压力更大时,上部活塞164可以延伸并且可以经由杆缩回流体路径322推动流体流出上部活塞164。当经由杆缩回流体路径322比杆延伸流体路径312向液压流体供应的压力更大时,上部活塞164可以缩回并且可以经由杆延伸流体路径312推动流体流出上部活塞164。6A-6D , the cylinder housing 122 may include an upper cylinder 168 and a lower cylinder 268. The upper piston 164 may be confined within the upper cylinder 168 and configured to travel within the upper piston 164 when acted upon by hydraulic fluid. The upper rod 165 may be coupled to the upper piston 164 and move with the upper piston 164. The upper cylinder 168 may be in fluid communication with a rod-extend fluid path 312 and a rod-retract fluid path 322 on opposite sides of the upper piston 164. Thus, when a greater pressure is supplied to the hydraulic fluid via the rod-extend fluid path 312 than the rod-retract fluid path 322, the upper piston 164 may extend and may force fluid out of the upper piston 164 via the rod-retract fluid path 322. When the hydraulic fluid is supplied at a greater pressure via the rod-retract fluid path 322 than the rod-extend fluid path 312 , the upper piston 164 may retract and may force fluid out of the upper piston 164 via the rod-extend fluid path 312 .

类似地,下部活塞264可以限制在下部汽缸268内,并且可以被配置成当受到液压流体作用时在下部活塞264中行进。下部杆265可以联接到下部活塞264并且随着下部活塞264移动。下部汽缸268可以与下部活塞264的相对侧上的杆延伸流体路径314和杆缩回流体路径324流体连通。因此,当经由杆延伸流体路径314比杆缩回流体路径324向液压流体供应的压力更大时,下部活塞264可以延伸并且可以经由杆缩回流体路径324推动流体流出下部活塞264。当经由杆缩回流体路径324比杆延伸流体路径314向液压流体供应的压力更大时,下部活塞264可以缩回并且可以经由杆延伸流体路径314推动流体流出下部活塞264。Similarly, lower piston 264 can be confined within lower cylinder 268 and can be configured to travel within lower piston 264 when acted upon by hydraulic fluid. Lower rod 265 can be coupled to lower piston 264 and move with lower piston 264. Lower cylinder 268 can be in fluid communication with rod-extend fluid path 314 and rod-retract fluid path 324 on opposite sides of lower piston 264. Thus, when the pressure of hydraulic fluid supplied via rod-extend fluid path 314 is greater than the pressure of rod-retract fluid path 324, lower piston 264 can extend and can force fluid out of lower piston 264 via rod-retract fluid path 324. When the pressure of hydraulic fluid supplied via rod-retract fluid path 324 is greater than the pressure of rod-extend fluid path 314, lower piston 264 can retract and can force fluid out of lower piston 264 via rod-extend fluid path 314.

在一些实施例中,液压致动器120以自动平衡的方式致动上部杆165和下部杆265,从而允许上部杆165和下部杆265以不同速度延伸和缩回。申请人已发现,当上部杆165和下部杆265自动平衡时,液压致动器120可以用更大的可靠性和速度延伸和缩回。在不受理论束缚下,据信上部杆165和下部杆265的致动的差分速度允许液压致动器120对多种装载条件动态地作出反应。例如,杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314可以彼此直接流体连通,无需在其之间安置任何压力调节装置。类似地,杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324可以彼此直接流体连通,无需在其之间安置任何压力调节装置。因此,当同时推动液压流体通过杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314时,上部杆165和下部杆265可以根据作用于上部杆165和下部杆265中的每个杆上的阻力的差异而以差动方式延伸,该阻力诸如例如是所施加的负载、位移体积、连杆运动等等。类似地,当同时推动液压流体通过杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324时,上部杆165和下部杆265可以根据作用于上部杆165和下部杆265中的每个杆上的阻力的差异而以差动方式缩回。In some embodiments, the hydraulic actuator 120 actuates the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 in a self-balancing manner, thereby allowing the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 to extend and retract at different speeds. Applicants have discovered that when the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 are self-balancing, the hydraulic actuator 120 can extend and retract with greater reliability and speed. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the differential speed of actuation of the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 allows the hydraulic actuator 120 to dynamically respond to a variety of loading conditions. For example, the rod extend fluid path 312 and the rod extend fluid path 314 can be in direct fluid communication with each other without any pressure regulating device disposed therebetween. Similarly, the rod retract fluid path 322 and the rod retract fluid path 324 can be in direct fluid communication with each other without any pressure regulating device disposed therebetween. Thus, when hydraulic fluid is simultaneously pushed through rod-extend fluid path 312 and rod-extend fluid path 314, upper rod 165 and lower rod 265 can be extended differentially based on the difference in resistance acting on each of upper rod 165 and lower rod 265, such as, for example, applied load, displacement volume, connecting rod motion, etc. Similarly, when hydraulic fluid is simultaneously pushed through rod-retract fluid path 322 and rod-retract fluid path 324, upper rod 165 and lower rod 265 can be retracted differentially based on the difference in resistance acting on each of upper rod 165 and lower rod 265.

仍参考图6A至图6D,液压回路壳体150可以形成液压回路300,用于通过延伸流体路径310和缩回流体路径320传输流体。在一些实施例中,液压回路300可以配置成使得通过泵电机160的选择性操作,可以在延伸流体路径310和缩回流体路径320中的每条流体路径中推动或牵拉液压流体。具体地说,泵电机160可以经由流体供应路径304与流体储集器162流体连通。泵电机160还可以经由泵延伸流体路径326与延伸流体路径310流体连通,并且经由泵缩回流体路径316与缩回流体路径320流体连通。因此,泵电机160可以从流体储集器162牵拉液压流体并推动液压流体通过泵延伸流体路径326或泵缩回流体路径316以延伸或缩回液压致动器120。应注意,虽然本文相对于图6A至图6D所述的液压回路300的实施例具体说明了使用某些类型的组件,诸如电磁阀、止回阀、配衡阀、手动阀或流量调节器,但是本文所述的实施例不限于使用任何特定组件。实际上,相对于液压回路300描述的组件可以换成组合执行本文所述的液压回路300的功能的等效组件。Still referring to Figures 6A-6D, the hydraulic circuit housing 150 can form a hydraulic circuit 300 for transmitting fluid through an extend fluid path 310 and a retract fluid path 320. In some embodiments, the hydraulic circuit 300 can be configured such that, through selective operation of the pump motor 160, hydraulic fluid can be pushed or pulled in each of the extend fluid path 310 and the retract fluid path 320. Specifically, the pump motor 160 can be in fluid communication with the fluid reservoir 162 via a fluid supply path 304. The pump motor 160 can also be in fluid communication with the extend fluid path 310 via a pump extend fluid path 326, and with the retract fluid path 320 via a pump retract fluid path 316. Thus, the pump motor 160 can pull hydraulic fluid from the fluid reservoir 162 and push the hydraulic fluid through the pump extend fluid path 326 or the pump retract fluid path 316 to extend or retract the hydraulic actuator 120. It should be noted that while the embodiments of the hydraulic circuit 300 described herein with respect to Figures 6A to 6D specifically describe the use of certain types of components, such as solenoid valves, check valves, balancing valves, manual valves, or flow regulators, the embodiments described herein are not limited to the use of any particular components. In fact, the components described with respect to the hydraulic circuit 300 can be replaced with equivalent components that, in combination, perform the functions of the hydraulic circuit 300 described herein.

参看图6A,泵电机160可以沿着延伸路线360推动液压流体(总体上通过箭头表示)以延伸上部杆165和下部杆265。在一些实施例中,延伸流体路径310可以与杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314流体连通。缩回流体路径320可以与杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324流体连通。泵电机160可以经由流体供应路径从流体储集器162牵拉液压流体。可以经由泵延伸流体路径326朝向延伸流体路径310推动液压流体。6A , pump motor 160 can push hydraulic fluid (generally indicated by arrows) along extend path 360 to extend upper rod 165 and lower rod 265. In some embodiments, extend fluid path 310 can be in fluid communication with rod extend fluid path 312 and rod extend fluid path 314. Retract fluid path 320 can be in fluid communication with rod retract fluid path 322 and rod retract fluid path 324. Pump motor 160 can pull hydraulic fluid from fluid reservoir 162 via fluid supply path. Hydraulic fluid can be pushed toward extend fluid path 310 via pump extend fluid path 326.

泵延伸流体路径326可以包括止回阀332,被配置成防止液压流体从延伸流体路径310流到泵电机160,并且允许液压流体从泵电机160流到延伸流体路径310。因此,泵电机160可以推动液压流体通过延伸路径流到杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314中。液压流体可以沿着延伸路线360流到上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268中。当上部杆165和下部杆265延伸时,流入上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268的液压流体可以使液压流体流入杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324中。液压流体可以接着沿着延伸路线360流到缩回流体路径320中。The pump extend fluid path 326 may include a check valve 332 configured to prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from the extend fluid path 310 to the pump motor 160 and to allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the pump motor 160 to the extend fluid path 310. Thus, the pump motor 160 may force hydraulic fluid through the extend path into the rod extend fluid path 312 and the rod extend fluid path 314. The hydraulic fluid may flow along the extend path 360 into the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268. When the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 are extended, the hydraulic fluid flowing into the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268 may cause hydraulic fluid to flow into the rod retract fluid path 322 and the rod retract fluid path 324. The hydraulic fluid may then flow along the extend path 360 into the retract fluid path 320.

液压回路300可进一步包括延伸返回流体路径306,其与缩回流体路径320和流体储集器162中的每一个流体连通。在一些实施例中,延伸返回流体路径306可以包括配衡阀334,其被配置成允许液压流体从流体储集器162流到缩回流体路径320,并且防止液压流体从缩回流体路径320流到流体储集器162,除非经由引导线328接收到适当的压力。引导线328可以与泵延伸流体路径326和配衡阀334流体连通。因此,当泵电机160泵送液压流体通过泵延伸流体路径326时,引导线328可以使配衡阀334调制并且允许液压流体从缩回流体路径320流到流体储集器162。The hydraulic circuit 300 may further include an extend return fluid path 306 in fluid communication with each of the retract fluid path 320 and the fluid reservoir 162. In some embodiments, the extend return fluid path 306 may include a balancing valve 334 configured to allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the fluid reservoir 162 to the retract fluid path 320 and prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from the retract fluid path 320 to the fluid reservoir 162 unless an appropriate pressure is received via a guide line 328. The guide line 328 may be in fluid communication with the pump extend fluid path 326 and the balancing valve 334. Thus, when the pump motor 160 pumps hydraulic fluid through the pump extend fluid path 326, the guide line 328 may cause the balancing valve 334 to modulate and allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the retract fluid path 320 to the fluid reservoir 162.

任选地,延伸返回流体路径306可以包括止回阀346,其被配置成防止液压流体从流体储集器162流到缩回流体路径320,并且允许液压流体从延伸返回流体路径306流到流体储集器162。因此,泵电机160可以推动液压流体通过缩回流体路径320流到流体储集器162。在一些实施例中,与打开止回阀346需要的相对少量的压力相比,可能需要相对大量的压力打开止回阀332。在另外的实施例中,打开止回阀332需要的相对大量的压力可以超过打开止回阀346需要的相对少量的压力的大约两倍,诸如,例如在另一实施例中是该压力的大约3倍或更大,或者在又一实施例中是该压力的大约5倍或更大。Optionally, extend-return fluid path 306 may include a check valve 346 configured to prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from fluid reservoir 162 to retract fluid path 320 and to allow hydraulic fluid to flow from extend-return fluid path 306 to fluid reservoir 162. Thus, pump motor 160 may force hydraulic fluid through retract fluid path 320 to fluid reservoir 162. In some embodiments, a relatively large amount of pressure may be required to open check valve 332 compared to the relatively small amount of pressure required to open check valve 346. In other embodiments, the relatively large amount of pressure required to open check valve 332 may exceed approximately twice the relatively small amount of pressure required to open check valve 346, such as, for example, approximately three times or more of the pressure in another embodiment, or approximately five times or more of the pressure in yet another embodiment.

在一些实施例中,液压回路300可进一步包括再生流体路径350,其被配置成允许液压流体直接从缩回流体路径320流到延伸流体路径310。因此,再生流体路径350可以允许从杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324供应的液压流体沿着再生路线362朝向杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314流动。在另外的实施例中,再生流体路径350可以包括逻辑阀352,其被配置成选择性地允许液压流体沿着再生路线362行进。逻辑阀352可以通信地联接到处理器或传感器,并且配置成在卧床处于预定状态时打开。例如,当与支腿相关联的液压致动器120相对于第一位置处于第二位置(如本文所述,可以表示未负载状态)时,逻辑阀352可以打开。可能需要在液压致动器120延伸期间打开逻辑阀352以加快延伸速度。再生流体路径350可进一步包括止回阀354,其被配置成防止液压流体从缩回流体路径320流到延伸流体路径310。在一些实施例中,打开止回阀332需要的压力量与打开止回阀354需要的压力量大约相同。In some embodiments, the hydraulic circuit 300 may further include a regeneration fluid path 350 configured to allow hydraulic fluid to flow directly from the retraction fluid path 320 to the extension fluid path 310. Thus, the regeneration fluid path 350 can allow hydraulic fluid supplied from the rod retraction fluid path 322 and the rod retraction fluid path 324 to flow along a regeneration route 362 toward the rod extension fluid path 312 and the rod extension fluid path 314. In other embodiments, the regeneration fluid path 350 can include a logic valve 352 configured to selectively allow hydraulic fluid to flow along the regeneration route 362. The logic valve 352 can be communicatively coupled to a processor or sensor and configured to open when the bed is in a predetermined state. For example, the logic valve 352 can open when the hydraulic actuator 120 associated with the leg is in a second position relative to the first position (which, as described herein, can represent an unloaded state). Opening the logic valve 352 during extension of the hydraulic actuator 120 may be desirable to accelerate the extension process. Regeneration fluid path 350 may further include a check valve 354 configured to prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from retraction fluid path 320 to extension fluid path 310. In some embodiments, the amount of pressure required to open check valve 332 is approximately the same as the amount of pressure required to open check valve 354.

参看图6B,泵电机160可以沿着缩回路线364推动液压流体(总体上通过箭头表示)以缩回上部杆165和下部杆265。泵电机160可以经由流体供应路径304从流体储集器162牵拉液压流体。可以经由泵缩回流体路径316朝向缩回流体路径320推动液压流体。泵缩回流体路径316可以包括止回阀330,其被配置成防止液压流体从缩回流体路径320流到泵电机160,并且允许液压流体从泵电机160流到缩回流体路径320。因此,泵电机160可以推动液压流体通过缩回流体路径320流到杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324中。6B , the pump motor 160 can push hydraulic fluid (generally indicated by arrows) along a retract path 364 to retract the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265. The pump motor 160 can pull hydraulic fluid from the fluid reservoir 162 via the fluid supply path 304. The hydraulic fluid can be pushed toward the retract fluid path 320 via the pump retract fluid path 316. The pump retract fluid path 316 can include a check valve 330 that is configured to prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from the retract fluid path 320 to the pump motor 160 and to allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the pump motor 160 to the retract fluid path 320. Thus, the pump motor 160 can push hydraulic fluid through the retract fluid path 320 into the rod retract fluid path 322 and the rod retract fluid path 324.

液压流体可以沿着缩回路线364流到上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268中。在上部杆165和下部杆265缩回时,流入上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268中的液压流体可以使液压流体流入杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314中。液压流体可以接着沿着缩回路线364流到延伸流体路径310中。Hydraulic fluid can flow into the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268 along the retract route 364. As the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 retract, the hydraulic fluid flowing into the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268 can cause hydraulic fluid to flow into the rod extend fluid path 312 and the rod extend fluid path 314. The hydraulic fluid can then flow into the extend fluid path 310 along the retract route 364.

液压回路300可进一步包括缩回返回流体路径308,其与延伸流体路径310和流体储集器162中的每一个流体连通。在一些实施例中,缩回返回流体路径308可以包括配衡阀336,其被配置成允许液压流体从流体储集器162流到延伸流体路径310,并且防止液压流体从延伸流体路径310流到流体储集器162,除非经由引导线318接收到适当的压力。引导线318可以与泵缩回流体路径316和配衡阀336流体连通。因此,当泵电机160泵送液压流体通过泵缩回流体路径316时,引导线318可以使配衡阀336调制并且允许液压流体从延伸流体路径310流到流体储集器162。The hydraulic circuit 300 may further include a retract return fluid path 308 in fluid communication with each of the extend fluid path 310 and the fluid reservoir 162. In some embodiments, the retract return fluid path 308 may include a balancing valve 336 configured to allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the fluid reservoir 162 to the extend fluid path 310 and prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from the extend fluid path 310 to the fluid reservoir 162 unless an appropriate pressure is received via a guide line 318. The guide line 318 may be in fluid communication with the pump retract fluid path 316 and the balancing valve 336. Thus, when the pump motor 160 pumps hydraulic fluid through the pump retract fluid path 316, the guide line 318 may cause the balancing valve 336 to modulate and allow hydraulic fluid to flow from the extend fluid path 310 to the fluid reservoir 162.

同时参照图6A至图6D,虽然液压致动器120通常是通过泵电机160供电,但是也可以在绕过泵电机160之后手动地致动液压致动器120。具体地说,液压回路300可以包括手动供应流体路径370、手动缩回返回流体路径372和手动延伸返回流体路径374。手动供应流体路径370可以被配置成用于向上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268供应流体。在一些实施例中,手动供应流体路径370可以与流体储集器162和延伸流体路径310流体连通。在另外的实施例中,手动供应流体路径370可以包括止回阀348,其被配置成防止液压流体从手动供应流体路径370流到流体储集器162,并且允许液压流体从流体储集器162流到延伸流体路径310。因此,手动操控上部活塞164和下部活塞264可以使液压流体流过止回阀348。在一些实施例中,与打开止回阀346需要的相对大量的压力相比,可能需要相对少量的压力打开止回阀348。在另外的实施例中,打开止回阀348需要的相对少量的压力可以小于或等于打开止回阀346需要的相对大量的压力的大约1/2,诸如例如在另一实施例中小于或等于大约1/5,或者在又一实施例中小于或等于大约1/10。6A-6D , while the hydraulic actuator 120 is typically powered by the pump motor 160, it can also be manually actuated after bypassing the pump motor 160. Specifically, the hydraulic circuit 300 may include a manual supply fluid path 370, a manual retract return fluid path 372, and a manual extend return fluid path 374. The manual supply fluid path 370 may be configured to supply fluid to the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268. In some embodiments, the manual supply fluid path 370 may be in fluid communication with the fluid reservoir 162 and the extend fluid path 310. In other embodiments, the manual supply fluid path 370 may include a check valve 348 configured to prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing from the manual supply fluid path 370 to the fluid reservoir 162 and to allow hydraulic fluid from the fluid reservoir 162 to flow to the extend fluid path 310. Thus, manual manipulation of the upper piston 164 and the lower piston 264 may cause hydraulic fluid to flow through the check valve 348. In some embodiments, a relatively small amount of pressure may be required to open check valve 348 compared to the relatively large amount of pressure required to open check valve 346. In other embodiments, the relatively small amount of pressure required to open check valve 348 may be less than or equal to approximately 1/2 of the relatively large amount of pressure required to open check valve 346, such as, for example, less than or equal to approximately 1/5 in another embodiment, or less than or equal to approximately 1/10 in yet another embodiment.

手动缩回返回流体路径372可以被配置成将来自上部汽缸和下部汽缸268的液压流体返回到流体储集器162,回到上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268,或这两个方向。在一些实施例中,手动缩回返回流体路径372可以与延伸流体路径310和延伸返回流体路径306流体连通。手动缩回返回流体路径372可以包括手动阀342,其可以从正常关闭位置致动到打开位置,以及流量调节器344,其被配置成限制可以流过手动缩回返回流体路径372的液压流体量,即,每单位时间体积。因此,可以使用流量调节器344提供卧床10的受控制的下降。应注意,虽然在图12A至图12D中描绘流量调节器344位于手动阀342与延伸流体路径310之间,但是流量调节器344可以位于液压回路300中任何适合于限制上部杆165、下部杆265或这两个元件的缩回速度的位置。The manual retract return fluid path 372 can be configured to return hydraulic fluid from the upper and lower cylinders 268 to the fluid reservoir 162, back to the upper and lower cylinders 168, 268, or in both directions. In some embodiments, the manual retract return fluid path 372 can be in fluid communication with the extend fluid path 310 and the extend return fluid path 306. The manual retract return fluid path 372 can include a manual valve 342 that can be actuated from a normally closed position to an open position, and a flow regulator 344 that is configured to limit the amount of hydraulic fluid that can flow through the manual retract return fluid path 372, i.e., the volume per unit time. Thus, the flow regulator 344 can be used to provide controlled lowering of the couch 10. It should be noted that although the flow regulator 344 is depicted in Figures 12A to 12D as being located between the manual valve 342 and the extension fluid path 310, the flow regulator 344 can be located in any position in the hydraulic circuit 300 suitable for limiting the retraction speed of the upper rod 165, the lower rod 265, or both elements.

手动延伸返回流体路径374可以被配置成将来自上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268的液压流体返回到流体储集器162,回到上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268,或这两个方向。在一些实施例中,手动延伸返回流体路径374可以与缩回流体路径320、手动缩回返回流体路径372和延伸返回流体路径306流体连通。手动延伸返回流体路径374可以包括手动阀343,其可以从正常关闭位置致动成打开位置。The manual extend return fluid path 374 can be configured to return hydraulic fluid from the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268 to the fluid reservoir 162, back to the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268, or in both directions. In some embodiments, the manual extend return fluid path 374 can be in fluid communication with the retract fluid path 320, the manual retract return fluid path 372, and the extend return fluid path 306. The manual extend return fluid path 374 can include a manual valve 343 that can be actuated from a normally closed position to an open position.

在一些实施例中,液压回路300还可以包括手动释放组件(例如按钮、受拉部件、开关、连杆或拉杆),其致动手动阀342和手动阀343,以允许上部杆165和下部杆265延伸和缩回,而且无需使用泵电机160。参看图6C的实施例,手动阀342和手动阀343可以(例如)经由手动释放组件打开。力可以作用于液压回路300上以延伸上部杆165和下部杆265,诸如例如上部杆165和下部杆265的重力或手动铰接。在手动阀342和343打开的情况下,液压流体可以沿着手动延伸路线366流动,以便于上部杆165和下部杆265的延伸。具体地说,当上部杆165和下部杆265延伸时,液压流体可以从上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268移动到杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324中。液压流体可以从杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324行进到缩回流体路径320中。In some embodiments, the hydraulic circuit 300 may further include a manual release assembly (e.g., a button, tension member, switch, linkage, or pull rod) that actuates manual valves 342 and 343 to allow the upper and lower rods 165, 265 to extend and retract without using the pump motor 160. Referring to the embodiment of FIG. 6C, the manual valves 342 and 343 may be opened, for example, via the manual release assembly. A force may act on the hydraulic circuit 300 to extend the upper and lower rods 165, 265, such as, for example, gravity or manual articulation of the upper and lower rods 165, 265. With the manual valves 342 and 343 open, hydraulic fluid may flow along the manual extension route 366 to facilitate extension of the upper and lower rods 165, 265. Specifically, when upper rod 165 and lower rod 265 extend, hydraulic fluid can move from upper cylinder 168 and lower cylinder 268 into rod retract fluid path 322 and rod retract fluid path 324. Hydraulic fluid can travel from rod retract fluid path 322 and rod retract fluid path 324 into retract fluid path 320.

液压流体还可以通过手动延伸返回流体路径374朝向延伸返回流体路径306和手动缩回返回流体路径372行进。根据上部杆165和下部杆265的延伸速度或施加力,液压流体可以流过延伸返回流体路径306,经过止回阀346并且进入流体储集器162中。液压流体还可以通过手动缩回返回流体路径372朝向延伸流体路径310流动。液压流体还可以经由手动供应流体路径370从流体储集器162供应到延伸流体路径310,即,当手动操作生成足够使液压流体流经止回阀348的压力时。延伸流体路径310处的液压流体可以流到杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314。上部杆165和下部杆265的手动延伸可以使液压流体从杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314流入上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268中。Hydraulic fluid can also travel toward extend return fluid path 306 and manual retract return fluid path 372 via manual extend return fluid path 374. Depending on the speed or force applied to extend upper and lower rods 165 and 265, hydraulic fluid can flow through extend return fluid path 306, past check valve 346, and into fluid reservoir 162. Hydraulic fluid can also flow toward extend fluid path 310 via manual retract return fluid path 372. Hydraulic fluid can also be supplied from fluid reservoir 162 to extend fluid path 310 via manual supply fluid path 370, i.e., when manual operation generates sufficient pressure to cause hydraulic fluid to flow through check valve 348. Hydraulic fluid at extend fluid path 310 can flow to rod extend fluid path 312 and rod extend fluid path 314. Manual extension of upper and lower rods 165 and 265 can cause hydraulic fluid from rod extend fluid path 312 and rod extend fluid path 314 to flow into upper and lower cylinders 168 and 268.

再次参看图6D,当手动阀342和手动阀343打开时,液压流体可以沿着手动缩回路线368流动以便于缩回上部杆165和下部杆265。具体地说,当上部杆165和下部杆265缩回时,液压流体可以从上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268移动到杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314中。液压流体可以从杆延伸流体路径312和杆延伸流体路径314行进到延伸流体路径310中。6D , when manual valves 342 and 343 are open, hydraulic fluid can flow along manual retract path 368 to facilitate retracting upper rod 165 and lower rod 265. Specifically, when upper rod 165 and lower rod 265 are retracted, hydraulic fluid can move from upper cylinder 168 and lower cylinder 268 into rod extend fluid path 312 and rod extend fluid path 314. Hydraulic fluid can travel from rod extend fluid path 312 and rod extend fluid path 314 into extend fluid path 310.

液压流体还可以通过手动缩回返回流体路径372朝向流量调节器344行进,流量调节器344操作以限制液压流体的流动速度以及上部杆165和下部杆265的缩回速度。液压流体可以接着朝向手动延伸返回流体路径374流动。液压流体可以接着流过手动延伸返回流体路径374进入缩回流体路径320中。根据上部杆165和下部杆265的缩回速度和流量调节器344的容许流速,一些液压流体可能经过止回阀346泄漏到流体储集器162中。在一些实施例中,流量调节器344的容许流速速率和止回阀346的打开压力可以被配置成基本上防止液压流体在手动缩回期间流经止回阀346。申请人发现,通过禁止流经止回阀346,可以确保上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268一直保持预装,并且在手动缩回期间空气穿透的情况减少。Hydraulic fluid can also travel through the manual retract return fluid path 372 toward the flow regulator 344, which operates to limit the flow rate of the hydraulic fluid and the retraction speed of the upper and lower rods 165, 265. The hydraulic fluid can then flow toward the manual extend return fluid path 374. The hydraulic fluid can then flow through the manual extend return fluid path 374 into the retract fluid path 320. Depending on the retraction speed of the upper and lower rods 165, 265 and the permissible flow rate of the flow regulator 344, some hydraulic fluid may leak past the check valve 346 into the fluid reservoir 162. In some embodiments, the permissible flow rate of the flow regulator 344 and the opening pressure of the check valve 346 can be configured to substantially prevent hydraulic fluid from flowing through the check valve 346 during manual retraction. Applicants have discovered that by prohibiting flow through the check valve 346, the upper and lower cylinders 168, 268 can be ensured to remain primed at all times, and air penetration during manual retraction can be reduced.

缩回流体路径320中的液压流体可以流到杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324。上部杆165和下部杆265的手动缩回可以使液压流体从杆缩回流体路径322和杆缩回流体路径324流入上部汽缸168和下部汽缸268中。应注意,虽然相对于图6C和图6D描述的手动实施例描绘延伸和缩回是分开的操作,可以设想手动延伸和手动缩回可以在单一操作内执行。例如,在打开手动阀342和手动阀343后,上部杆165和下部杆265可以响应于施加力延伸、缩回或依次执行这两个动作。Hydraulic fluid in the retraction fluid path 320 can flow to the rod retraction fluid path 322 and the rod retraction fluid path 324. Manual retraction of the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 can cause hydraulic fluid from the rod retraction fluid path 322 and the rod retraction fluid path 324 to flow into the upper cylinder 168 and the lower cylinder 268. It should be noted that although the manual embodiment described with respect to Figures 6C and 6D depicts extension and retraction as separate operations, it is contemplated that manual extension and manual retraction can be performed within a single operation. For example, after opening manual valves 342 and 343, the upper rod 165 and the lower rod 265 can extend, retract, or perform both actions sequentially in response to an applied force.

再次参看图1和图2,为了确定卧床10是否水平,可以使用传感器(未描绘)测量距离和/或角度。例如,前部致动器16和后部致动器18可以各自包括编码器,编码器确定每个致动器的长度。在一个实施例中,编码器是实时编码器,在卧床被供电或未被供电(即,手动控制)时,该编码器可操作以检测致动器的总长度的移动或致动器的长度的变化。虽然能设想各种编码器,但是在一个商用实施例中,编码器可以是Midwest Motion Products,Inc.of Watertown,MN U.S.A产生的光学编码器。在其它实施例中,卧床包括角度传感器,其测量实际角度或角度变化,诸如例如电位计旋转传感器、霍耳效应旋转传感器等等。角度传感器可以可操作以检测装载端支腿20和/或控制端支腿40的任何枢转联接的部分的角度。在一个实施例中,角度传感器可操作地联接到装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40,以检测装载端支腿20的角度与控制端支腿40的角度之间的差异(角度Δ)。装载状态角度可以设置成诸如大约20°的角度或任何其它总体上表示卧床10处于一种装载状态(表示装载和/或卸载)的角度。因此,当角度Δ超出该装载状态角度时,卧床10可以检测到它处在一种装载状态,并且根据处于该装载状态执行某些动作。Referring again to Figures 1 and 2, to determine whether the couch 10 is level, sensors (not depicted) can be used to measure distance and/or angle. For example, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 can each include an encoder that determines the length of each actuator. In one embodiment, the encoder is a real-time encoder that is operable to detect movement of the total length of the actuator or changes in the length of the actuator while the couch is powered or unpowered (i.e., manually controlled). While various encoders are contemplated, in one commercial embodiment, the encoder can be an optical encoder manufactured by Midwest Motion Products, Inc. of Watertown, MN, U.S.A. In other embodiments, the couch includes an angle sensor that measures actual angle or change in angle, such as, for example, a potentiometer rotation sensor, a Hall effect rotation sensor, or the like. The angle sensor can be operable to detect the angle of any pivotally coupled portion of the load-end leg 20 and/or the control-end leg 40. In one embodiment, an angle sensor is operably coupled to the loading-end leg 20 and the control-end leg 40 to detect a difference (angle Δ) between the angle of the loading-end leg 20 and the angle of the control-end leg 40. The loaded state angle can be set to an angle, such as approximately 20°, or any other angle generally indicating that the couchette 10 is in a loaded state (indicating loading and/or unloading). Thus, when the angle Δ exceeds the loaded state angle, the couchette 10 can detect that it is in a loaded state and perform certain actions based on being in the loaded state.

现在参看图7,在一个实施例中,控制匣50通信地联接(总体上通过标有箭头的线表示)到一个或多个处理器100。一个或多个处理器100中的每一个处理器可以是任何能够执行机器可读指令的装置,诸如例如控制器、集成电路、微芯片等等。如本文所使用,术语“通信地联接”意思是组件能够彼此交换数据信号,诸如例如经由导电介质交换电信号、经由空气交换电磁信号、经由光学波导交换光信号等等。7 , in one embodiment, the control cartridge 50 is communicatively coupled (generally represented by lines marked with arrows) to one or more processors 100. Each of the one or more processors 100 can be any device capable of executing machine-readable instructions, such as, for example, a controller, an integrated circuit, a microchip, etc. As used herein, the term “communicatively coupled” means that the components are capable of exchanging data signals with each other, such as, for example, exchanging electrical signals via a conductive medium, exchanging electromagnetic signals via air, exchanging optical signals via optical waveguides, etc.

一个或多个处理器100可以通信地联接到一个或多个存储器模块102,存储器模块102可以是任何能够存储机器可读指令的装置。所述一个或多个存储器模块102可以包括任何类型的存储器,诸如例如只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、辅助存储器(例如硬盘驱动器)或其组合。ROM的合适的示例包括(但不限于)可编程只读存储器(PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(EEPROM)、电可更改只读存储器(EAROM)、快闪存储器或其组合。RAM的合适的示例包括(但不限于)静态RAM(SRAM)或动态RAM(DRAM)。The one or more processors 100 may be communicatively coupled to one or more memory modules 102, which may be any device capable of storing machine-readable instructions. The one or more memory modules 102 may include any type of memory, such as, for example, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), secondary storage (e.g., a hard drive), or a combination thereof. Suitable examples of ROM include, but are not limited to, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), electrically alterable read-only memory (EAROM), flash memory, or a combination thereof. Suitable examples of RAM include, but are not limited to, static RAM (SRAM) or dynamic RAM (DRAM).

本文所述的实施例可以通过用一个或多个处理器100执行机器可读指令而自动实行方法。机器可读指令可以包括用任何代际(例如1GL、2GL、3GL、4GL或5GL)的任何编程语言编写的逻辑或算法,诸如例如可以直接由处理器执行的机器语言,或汇编语言、面向对象的编程(OOP)、脚本处理语言、微码等,其可以被编译或汇编到机器可读指令中并且加以存储。替代地,机器可读指令可以用硬件描述语言(HDL)编写,诸如经由现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)配置或专用集成电路(ASIC)或其等效物实施的逻辑。因此,本文所描述的方法可以用任何常规计算机编程语言实施、实施成预编程的硬件元件、或实施成硬件与软件组件的组合。The embodiments described herein can automatically implement the methods by executing machine-readable instructions with one or more processors 100. The machine-readable instructions can include logic or algorithms written in any programming language of any generation (e.g., 1GL, 2GL, 3GL, 4GL, or 5GL), such as, for example, machine language that can be executed directly by a processor, or assembly language, object-oriented programming (OOP), scripting language, microcode, etc., which can be compiled or assembled into machine-readable instructions and stored. Alternatively, the machine-readable instructions can be written in a hardware description language (HDL), such as logic implemented via a field programmable gate array (FPGA) configuration or an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or its equivalent. Therefore, the methods described herein can be implemented in any conventional computer programming language, implemented as pre-programmed hardware elements, or implemented as a combination of hardware and software components.

同时参照图2和图7,前部致动器传感器62和后部致动器传感器64被配置成检测前部致动器16和后部致动器18是否分别位于第一位置或第二位置,第一位置使每个致动器的位置相对更接近一对横向部件63、65中的相应一个横向部件的底面(图2),第二位置使每个致动器的位置相对于第一位置离横向部件63、65中的相应一个横向部件更远,并且将该检测传送到一个或多个处理器100。在一个实施例中,前部致动器传感器62和后部致动器传感器64联接到横向部件63、65中的相应一个横向部件;然而,本文中可以设想支撑框架12上的其它位置或配置。传感器62、64可以是距离测量传感器、串编码器、电位计旋转传感器、接近传感器、里德开关、霍尔效应传感器、其组合或者任何其它合适的可操作以检测何时前部致动器16和/或后部致动器18处在和/或经过第一位置和/或第二位置的传感器。在另外的实施例中,其它传感器可与前部和后部致动器16、18和/或横向部件63、65一起使用,以检测安置于卧床10上的患者的重量(例如经由应变计)。应注意,如本文所使用的术语“传感器”意思是测量物理数量、状态或属性并将其转换成与该物理数量、状态或属性的测量值相关的信号的装置。此外,术语“信号”意思是能够从一个位置传输到另一个位置的电、磁性或光学波形,诸如电流、电压、光通量、DC、AC、正弦波、三角波、方波等等。2 and 7 , the front actuator sensor 62 and the rear actuator sensor 64 are configured to detect whether the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18, respectively, are in a first position, the first position positioning each actuator relatively closer to a bottom surface of a corresponding one of a pair of cross members 63, 65 ( FIG. 2 ), or a second position positioning each actuator further from the corresponding one of the cross members 63, 65 relative to the first position, and transmit the detection to the one or more processors 100. In one embodiment, the front actuator sensor 62 and the rear actuator sensor 64 are coupled to a corresponding one of the cross members 63, 65; however, other positions or configurations on the support frame 12 are contemplated herein. The sensors 62, 64 can be distance measuring sensors, string encoders, potentiometer rotation sensors, proximity sensors, Reed switches, Hall effect sensors, combinations thereof, or any other suitable sensors operable to detect when the front actuator 16 and/or rear actuator 18 are in and/or pass through the first position and/or second position. In further embodiments, other sensors can be used with the front and rear actuators 16, 18 and/or cross members 63, 65 to detect the weight of a patient positioned on the bed 10 (e.g., via strain gauges). It should be noted that the term "sensor," as used herein, means a device that measures a physical quantity, state, or property and converts it into a signal related to the measured value of the physical quantity, state, or property. Additionally, the term "signal" means an electrical, magnetic, or optical waveform capable of being transmitted from one location to another, such as current, voltage, luminous flux, DC, AC, sine wave, triangle wave, square wave, etc.

同时参照图3和图7,卧床10可以包括前部角度传感器66和后部角度传感器68,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。前部角度传感器66和后部角度传感器68可以是任何传感器,其测量实际角度或角度的变化,诸如例如电位计旋转传感器、霍尔效应旋转传感器等等。前部角度传感器66可以可操作以检测装载端支腿20的枢转联接部分的前部角度αf。后部角度传感器68可以可操作以检测控制端支腿40的枢转联接部分的后部角度αb。在一个实施例中,前部角度传感器66和后部角度传感器68分别可操作地联接到装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40。因此,一个或多个处理器100可以执行机器可读指令以确定前部角度αf与后部角度αb之间的差异(角度Δ)。装载状态角度可以设置成诸如大约20°的角度或任何其它总体上表示卧床10处于一种装载状态(表示装载和/或卸载)的角度。因此,当角度Δ超出该装载状态角度时,卧床10可以检测到它处在一种装载状态,并且根据处于该装载状态执行某些动作。替代地,可以使用距离传感器执行类似于确定前部角度αf和后部角度αb的角度测量的测量。例如,可以从装载端支腿20和/或控制端支腿40相对于侧面部件15的定位确定该角度。例如,可以测量装载端支腿20与沿着侧面部件15的参考点之间的距离。类似地,可以测量控制端支腿40与沿着侧面部件15的参考点之间的距离。此外,可以测量前部致动器16和后部致动器18延伸的距离。因此,本文所述的距离测量或角度测量中的任一项测量可以互换使用以确定卧床10的组件的定位。Referring to FIG3 and FIG7 simultaneously, the sleeper 10 may include a front angle sensor 66 and a rear angle sensor 68, which are communicatively coupled to one or more processors 100. The front angle sensor 66 and the rear angle sensor 68 may be any sensor that measures an actual angle or a change in angle, such as, for example, a potentiometer rotation sensor, a Hall effect rotation sensor, or the like. The front angle sensor 66 may be operable to detect a front angle αf of the pivotal connection of the loading-end leg 20. The rear angle sensor 68 may be operable to detect a rear angle αb of the pivotal connection of the control-end leg 40. In one embodiment, the front angle sensor 66 and the rear angle sensor 68 are operably coupled to the loading-end leg 20 and the control-end leg 40, respectively. Thus, the one or more processors 100 may execute machine-readable instructions to determine the difference (angle Δ) between the front angle αf and the rear angle αb . The loaded state angle may be set to, for example, approximately 20° or any other angle generally indicating that the sleeper 10 is in a loaded state (representing loading and/or unloading). Thus, when the angle Δ exceeds the loaded state angle, the sleeper 10 can detect that it is in a loaded state and perform certain actions based on being in this loaded state. Alternatively, distance sensors can be used to perform angular measurements similar to those used to determine the front angle αf and the rear angle αb . For example, the angles can be determined from the positioning of the loading-end legs 20 and/or the control-end legs 40 relative to the side members 15. For example, the distance between the loading-end legs 20 and a reference point along the side members 15 can be measured. Similarly, the distance between the control-end legs 40 and a reference point along the side members 15 can be measured. Additionally, the distances between the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 can be measured. Thus, any of the distance measurements or angle measurements described herein can be used interchangeably to determine the positioning of components of the sleeper 10.

此外,应注意,距离传感器可以联接到卧床10的任何部分,使得可以确定下表面与诸如例如下列组件之间的距离:前端17、后端19、前部装载转轮70、前部转轮26、中间装载转轮30、后部转轮46、前部致动器16或后部致动器18。Furthermore, it should be noted that the distance sensor can be coupled to any portion of the bed 10 such that the distance between the lower surface and components such as, for example: the front end 17, the rear end 19, the front loading wheel 70, the front wheel 26, the middle loading wheel 30, the rear wheel 46, the front actuator 16, or the rear actuator 18 can be determined.

同时参照图3和图7,前端17可包括一对前部装载转轮70,其被配置成辅助将卧床10装载到装载表面(例如救护车的底板)上。卧床10可包括装载端传感器76,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。装载端传感器76是距离传感器,其可操作以检测前部装载转轮70相对于装载表面的位置(例如从检测到的表面到前部装载转轮70的距离)。合适的距离传感器包括(但不限于)超声波传感器、触摸传感器、接近传感器或任何其它能够检测离物体的距离的传感器。在一个实施例中,装载端传感器76可操作以直接或间接检测从前部装载转轮70到基本上直接在前部装载转轮70下方的表面的距离。具体地说,装载端传感器76可以在表面处在离前部装载转轮70的可定义距离范围内时(例如当表面大于第一距离但是小于第二距离时)提供指示,并且本文中也称为装载端传感器76“看到”装载表面。因此,可定义范围可以设置成使得在卧床10的前部装载转轮70接触装载表面时由装载端传感器76提供肯定指示。确保两个前部装载转轮70都在装载表面上,这一点可能是重要的,尤其是在卧床10以一定的斜度装载到救护车时的环境中。Referring to FIG3 and FIG7 simultaneously, the front end 17 may include a pair of front loading wheels 70 configured to assist in loading the cot 10 onto a loading surface (e.g., the floor of an ambulance). The cot 10 may include a loading-end sensor 76 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The loading-end sensor 76 is a distance sensor operable to detect the position of the front loading wheels 70 relative to the loading surface (e.g., the distance from the detected surface to the front loading wheels 70). Suitable distance sensors include, but are not limited to, ultrasonic sensors, touch sensors, proximity sensors, or any other sensor capable of detecting the distance to an object. In one embodiment, the loading-end sensor 76 is operable to directly or indirectly detect the distance from the front loading wheels 70 to a surface substantially directly below the front loading wheels 70. Specifically, the loading-end sensor 76 can provide an indication when a surface is within a definable distance range from the front loading wheels 70 (e.g., when the surface is greater than a first distance but less than a second distance), and is also referred to herein as the loading-end sensor 76 "seeing" the loading surface. Thus, the definable range can be set so that a positive indication is provided by the loading end sensor 76 when the front loading wheels 70 of the cot 10 contact the loading surface. Ensuring that both front loading wheels 70 are on the loading surface can be important, particularly in an environment where the cot 10 is loaded into the ambulance at an incline.

装载端支腿20可包括中间装载转轮30,其附接到装载端支腿20。在一个实施例中,中间装载转轮30可以安置于装载端支腿20上,邻近于前部横梁22(图2),前部致动器16安装到前部横梁的下端(图6)。如图1和图3所示,控制端支腿40未设有任何邻近于后部横梁42的中间装载转轮,后部致动器18安装到后部横梁的下端(图6)。卧床10可包括中间负载传感器77,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。中间负载传感器77是距离传感器,其可操作以检测中间装载转轮30与装载表面500之间的距离。在一个实施例中,当中间装载转轮30在装载表面的设置距离内时,中间负载传感器77可以向一个或多个处理器100提供信号。虽然图中描绘了中间装载转轮30仅仅在装载端支腿20上,但是进一步设想中间装载转轮30还可安置于控制端支腿40或卧床10上的任何其它位置上,使得中间装载转轮30与前部装载转轮70协作,以便于装载和/或卸载(例如支撑框架12)。例如,中间装载转轮可以设置在很可能是本文所述的装载和/或卸载过程期间的平衡支点或中心的任何位置。The loading-end leg 20 may include an intermediate loading wheel 30 attached to the loading-end leg 20. In one embodiment, the intermediate loading wheel 30 may be positioned on the loading-end leg 20 adjacent to the front crossbar 22 ( FIG. 2 ), with the front actuator 16 mounted to the lower end of the front crossbar ( FIG. 6 ). As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3 , the control-end leg 40 is not provided with any intermediate loading wheel adjacent to the rear crossbar 42, with the rear actuator 18 mounted to the lower end of the rear crossbar ( FIG. 6 ). The berth 10 may include an intermediate load sensor 77 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The intermediate load sensor 77 is a distance sensor operable to detect the distance between the intermediate loading wheel 30 and the loading surface 500. In one embodiment, the intermediate load sensor 77 may provide a signal to the one or more processors 100 when the intermediate loading wheel 30 is within a set distance of the loading surface. While the intermediate loading wheel 30 is depicted as being located solely on the loading-end leg 20, it is further contemplated that the intermediate loading wheel 30 may also be located on the control-end leg 40 or any other location on the couch 10, such that the intermediate loading wheel 30 cooperates with the front loading wheel 70 to facilitate loading and/or unloading (e.g., supporting the frame 12). For example, the intermediate loading wheel may be located at any location that is likely to be a fulcrum or center of balance during the loading and/or unloading processes described herein.

卧床10可包括后部致动器传感器78,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。后部致动器传感器78是可操作以检测后部致动器18与装载表面之间的距离的距离传感器。在一个实施例中,后部致动器传感器78可操作以直接或间接检测当控制端支腿40基本上完全缩回时(图4、图5D和图5E)从后部致动器18到基本上直接在后部致动器18下方的表面的距离。具体地说,后部致动器传感器78可以在表面处在后部致动器18的可定义距离范围内时(例如当表面大于第一距离但是小于第二距离时)提供指示。The sleeper 10 may include a rear actuator sensor 78 that is communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The rear actuator sensor 78 is a distance sensor operable to detect the distance between the rear actuator 18 and a loading surface. In one embodiment, the rear actuator sensor 78 is operable to directly or indirectly detect the distance from the rear actuator 18 to a surface substantially directly beneath the rear actuator 18 when the control end legs 40 are substantially fully retracted (Figures 4, 5D, and 5E). Specifically, the rear actuator sensor 78 can provide an indication when the surface is within a definable distance range of the rear actuator 18 (e.g., when the surface is greater than a first distance but less than a second distance).

仍参照图3和图7,卧床10可包括前部驱动灯86,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。前部驱动灯86可以联接到前部致动器16并且配置成与前部致动器16枢接。因此,当卧床10在前部致动器16延伸、缩回或在其之间的任何位置的情况下滚动时,前部驱动灯86可以照射卧床10的前端17的正前方的区域。卧床10还可包括后部驱动灯88,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。后部驱动灯88可以联接到后部致动器18,并且配置成与后部致动器18枢接。因此,当卧床10在后部致动器18延伸、缩回或在其之间的任何位置的情况下滚动时,后部驱动灯88可以照射卧床10的后端19的正后方的区域。卧床10还可包括一对环绕灯89,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。环绕灯89中的每一个可以联接到该对基本上平行的侧面部件15中的相应一个侧面部件,因而可以照射直接在卧床10侧面的区域。一个或多个处理器100可以从本文所述的任何操作人员控件接收输入,并且使得前部驱动灯86、后部驱动灯88、环绕灯89或其任何组合被激活。Still referring to Figures 3 and 7, the couch 10 may include a front driving light 86 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The front driving light 86 may be coupled to the front actuator 16 and configured to pivot therewith. Thus, when the couch 10 is rolled with the front actuator 16 extended, retracted, or any position therebetween, the front driving light 86 may illuminate the area directly in front of the front end 17 of the couch 10. The couch 10 may also include a rear driving light 88 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The rear driving light 88 may be coupled to the rear actuator 18 and configured to pivot therewith. Thus, when the couch 10 is rolled with the rear actuator 18 extended, retracted, or any position therebetween, the rear driving light 88 may illuminate the area directly behind the rear end 19 of the couch 10. The couch 10 may also include a pair of surround lights 89 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. Each of the surround lights 89 can be coupled to a respective one of the pair of substantially parallel side members 15, thereby illuminating an area directly to the side of the couch 10. The one or more processors 100 can receive input from any of the operator controls described herein and cause the front driving lights 86, the rear driving lights 88, the surround lights 89, or any combination thereof to be activated.

在一些实施例中,前部驱动灯86、后部驱动灯88和环绕灯89一起限定卧床10的安全照明系统。在卧床10的这个安全照明系统中,前部驱动灯86、后部驱动灯88和环绕灯89同时打开或关闭,并且可以受到诸如设置成按钮阵列52的两个按钮的控制,每个按钮限定不同的照射模式。例如,按钮阵列52中的按钮之一在被按压时可以限定“场景”灯模式,其中前部驱动灯86、后部驱动灯88和环绕灯89打开/关闭,并且其中环绕灯89在打开时照射稳定的白光。按钮阵列52中的另一个按钮在被按压时可以限定“急救”灯模式,其中前部驱动灯86、后部驱动灯88和环绕灯89打开/关闭,并且其中环绕灯89在打开时照射红-红-白光序列的闪光。In some embodiments, the front driving lights 86, rear driving lights 88, and surround lights 89 together define a safety lighting system for the bed 10. In this safety lighting system for the bed 10, the front driving lights 86, rear driving lights 88, and surround lights 89 turn on or off simultaneously and can be controlled by two buttons, such as two buttons arranged in the button array 52, each of which defines a different illumination mode. For example, one of the buttons in the button array 52, when pressed, can define a "scene" light mode, in which the front driving lights 86, rear driving lights 88, and surround lights 89 turn on/off, and in which the surround lights 89 illuminate a steady white light when on. Another button in the button array 52, when pressed, can define an "emergency" light mode, in which the front driving lights 86, rear driving lights 88, and surround lights 89 turn on/off, and in which the surround lights 89 illuminate a red-red-white light sequence when on.

同时参照图1和图7,卧床10可包括线指示器74,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。线指示器74可以是任何被配置成在表面上投射线性指示的光源,诸如例如激光、发光二极管、投影仪等等。在一个实施例中,线指示器74可以联接到卧床10并且配置成在卧床10下方的表面上投射线,使得线与中间装载转轮30对准。线可以从卧床10下方或者邻近于卧床10的点延伸到从卧床10的侧面偏移的点。因此,当线指示器投射线时,后端19的操作人员可以在装载、卸载或装载和卸载期间保持与线的视觉接触,并且使用该线作为卧床10的平衡中心(例如中间装载转轮30)的位置的参考。1 and 7 , the couch 10 may include a line indicator 74 communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The line indicator 74 may be any light source configured to project a linear indication on a surface, such as, for example, a laser, a light emitting diode, a projector, or the like. In one embodiment, the line indicator 74 may be coupled to the couch 10 and configured to project a line on a surface beneath the couch 10 such that the line is aligned with the intermediate loading wheel 30. The line may extend from a point beneath or adjacent to the couch 10 to a point offset from the side of the couch 10. Thus, when the line indicator projects the line, an operator at the back end 19 may maintain visual contact with the line during loading, unloading, or both, and use the line as a reference for the location of the center of balance of the couch 10 (e.g., the intermediate loading wheel 30).

后端19可包括卧床10用的操作人员控件57。如本文所使用,操作人员控件57包括从操作人员接收命令的输入组件和向操作人员提供指示的输出组件。因此,操作人员可以通过控制装载端支腿20、控制端支腿40和支撑框架12的移动,借此在装载和卸载卧床10时使用操作人员控件。操作人员控件57可以包括控制匣50,其安置于卧床10的后端19上。例如,控制匣50可以通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100,一个或多个处理器100又通信地联接到前部致动器16和后部致动器18。控制匣50可以包括视觉显示组件或图形用户界面(GUI)58,其被配置成告知操作人员前部和后部致动器16、18是激活还是解除激活。视觉显示组件或GUI 58可以包括任何能够发射图像的装置,诸如例如液晶显示器、触摸屏等等。The rear end 19 may include operator controls 57 for the couch 10. As used herein, operator controls 57 include input components for receiving commands from an operator and output components for providing instructions to the operator. Thus, an operator can use operator controls when loading and unloading the couch 10 by controlling the movement of the loading-end legs 20, the control-end legs 40, and the support frame 12. The operator controls 57 may include a control pod 50 positioned at the rear end 19 of the couch 10. For example, the control pod 50 may be communicatively coupled to one or more processors 100, which in turn are communicatively coupled to the front and rear actuators 16, 18. The control pod 50 may include a visual display component or graphical user interface (GUI) 58 configured to communicate to the operator whether the front and rear actuators 16, 18 are activated or deactivated. The visual display component or GUI 58 may include any device capable of emitting an image, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display, a touch screen, or the like.

同时参照图2、图7和图8,操作人员控件57可以可操作以接收指示执行卧床功能的需要的用户输入。操作人员控件57可以通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100,使得操作人员控件57接收到的输入可以被转换为控制信号,一个或多个处理器100接收该控制信号。因此,操作人员控件57可以包括任何类型的触感输入,其能够将物理输入转换成控制信号,诸如例如按钮、开关、麦克风、旋钮等等。应注意,虽然本文所述的实施例是参照前部致动器16和后部致动器18的自动操作,但是本文所述的实施例可以包括操作人员控件57,其被配置成直接控制前部致动器16和后部致动器18。也就是说,本文所描述的自动过程可以被用户超控,并且前部致动器16和后部致动器18可以独立于来自控件的输入而被致动。2 , 7 , and 8 , the operator controls 57 can be operable to receive user input indicating a need to perform a bed rest function. The operator controls 57 can be communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100 so that input received by the operator controls 57 can be converted into control signals, which are then received by the one or more processors 100. Thus, the operator controls 57 can include any type of tactile input capable of converting a physical input into a control signal, such as, for example, a button, switch, microphone, knob, etc. It should be noted that while the embodiments described herein refer to automatic operation of the front and rear actuators 16 , 18 , the embodiments described herein can include operator controls 57 configured to directly control the front and rear actuators 16 , 18 . That is, the automatic process described herein can be overridden by the user, and the front and rear actuators 16 , 18 can be actuated independently of input from the controls.

在一些实施例中,操作人员控件57可以位于卧床10的后端19上。例如,操作人员控件57可以包括位置邻近于视觉显示组件或GUI 58并且在其下方的按钮阵列52。按钮阵列52可以包括多个按钮,这些按钮例如并且不受限制地用于打开/关闭灯和照明模式,(例如)场景灯、急救灯等,以选择卧床的特定操作模式,例如下文后面的部分解释的多个“直接供电”模式之一,并且选择卧床的预定位置/布置,例如在按压相关按钮后自动配置并且下文后面的部分解释的“座椅位置”。按钮阵列52的每个按钮可以包括光学元件(即,LED),其在按钮激活时可以发射可见波长的光学能量。或者或另外,操作人员控件57可以包括按钮阵列52,位置邻近于视觉显示组件或GUI 58并且在其上方。应注意,虽然每个按钮阵列52描绘为由四个按钮组成,但是按钮阵列52可以包括任何数目的按钮。此外,操作人员控件57可以包括同心按钮阵列54(图8),其包括多个弧形按钮围绕中心按钮同心地布置。在一些实施例中,同心按钮阵列54可以位于视觉显示组件或GUI 58上方。在另外其它实施例中,可以在控制匣50的任一侧或两侧上设置一个或多个按钮53,其可以提供与按钮阵列52和/或54中的任何按钮相同和/或另外的功能。应注意,虽然操作人员控件57描绘为位于卧床10的后端19,但是进一步设想操作人员控件57可以位于支撑框架12上的替代位置,例如在支撑框架12的前端17或侧面上。在更进一步的实施例中,操作人员控件57可以位于可移除地附接的无线遥控器中,该无线遥控器可以控制卧床10而且无需实体附接到卧床10上。In some embodiments, operator controls 57 can be located on the rear end 19 of the bed 10. For example, the operator controls 57 can include a button array 52 positioned adjacent to and below the visual display assembly or GUI 58. The button array 52 can include a plurality of buttons used, for example and without limitation, to turn lights and lighting modes on and off, such as scene lights, emergency lights, etc., to select a particular operating mode of the bed, such as one of a plurality of "direct power" modes explained later in this section, and to select a predetermined position/arrangement of the bed, such as a "seat position" that is automatically configured upon pressing the associated button and explained later in this section. Each button of the button array 52 can include an optical element (i.e., an LED) that can emit optical energy in a visible wavelength when the button is activated. Alternatively or additionally, the operator controls 57 can include a button array 52 positioned adjacent to and above the visual display assembly or GUI 58. It should be noted that while each button array 52 is depicted as consisting of four buttons, the button array 52 can include any number of buttons. Additionally, the operator controls 57 may include a concentric button array 54 ( FIG. 8 ) comprising a plurality of arcuate buttons concentrically arranged around a central button. In some embodiments, the concentric button array 54 may be located above the visual display assembly or GUI 58. In still other embodiments, one or more buttons 53 may be provided on either or both sides of the control pod 50, which may provide the same and/or additional functionality as any of the buttons in the button arrays 52 and/or 54. It should be noted that while the operator controls 57 are depicted as being located at the rear end 19 of the couch 10, it is further contemplated that the operator controls 57 may be located at alternative locations on the support frame 12, such as at the front end 17 or sides of the support frame 12. In yet further embodiments, the operator controls 57 may be located in a removably attachable wireless remote control that can control the couch 10 without being physically attached to the couch 10.

操作人员控件57可进一步包括升高按钮56和降低按钮60,升高按钮56可操作以接收指示升高(“+”)卧床10的需要的输入,降低按钮60可操作以接收指示降低(“-”)卧床10的需要的输入。应了解,在其它实施例中,除了按钮56、60之外,升高和/或降低命令功能也可以分配给其它按钮,诸如按钮阵列52和/或54中的按钮。如本文中更详细地解释,升高按钮56和降低按钮60中的每一个按钮可以生成信号,该信号致动装载端支腿20、控制端支腿40或这两个以便执行卧床功能。卧床功能可能需要根据卧床10的位置和取向来升高、降低、缩回或释放装载端支腿20、控制端支腿40或这两个。在一些实施例中,降低按钮60和升高按钮56中的每一个按钮可以是模拟按钮(即,按钮的按压和/或位移可以与控制信号的参数成比例)。因此,装载端支腿20、控制端支腿40或这两个的致动速度可以与控制信号的参数成比例。或者或另外,降低按钮60和升高按钮56中的每一个按钮可以是背光按钮。The operator controls 57 may further include a raise button 56 operable to receive an input indicating a need to raise ("+") the couch 10, and a lower button 60 operable to receive an input indicating a need to lower ("-") the couch 10. It should be appreciated that in other embodiments, the raise and/or lower command functions may be assigned to other buttons, such as buttons in the button arrays 52 and/or 54, in addition to the buttons 56 and 60. As explained in greater detail herein, each of the raise and lower buttons 56 and 60 may generate a signal that actuates the load-end legs 20, the control-end legs 40, or both to perform a couch function. A couch function may require raising, lowering, retracting, or releasing the load-end legs 20, the control-end legs 40, or both, depending on the position and orientation of the couch 10. In some embodiments, each of the lower and raise buttons 60 and 56 may be analog buttons (i.e., a button press and/or displacement may be proportional to a parameter of a control signal). Thus, the actuation speed of the load end leg 20, the control end leg 40, or both, may be proportional to the parameter of the control signal.Alternatively or additionally, each of the lower button 60 and the raise button 56 may be a backlit button.

在图8的示出的实施例中,还示出提供按钮56、60的两个按钮组161、163。第一按钮组161设置于支撑框架12上的固定位置中,以便或邻近末端框架部件165。第二按钮组163设置在可伸缩把手167上,可伸缩把手167可以定位成邻近第一按钮组161。如图8中的箭头所示,可伸缩把手167可在第一位置与第二位置之间移动,在第一位置中,第二按钮组163定位成相对靠近或接近第一按钮组161,在第二位置中,第二按钮组163相对离开或远离第一按钮组161延伸。在一个实施例中,第一位置与第二位置之间的距离是225mm,在其它实施例中,该距离可以是选自120到400mm范围的距离。应了解,可伸缩把手167可在第一和第二位置以及在其之间的多个位置之间移动,并且可以锁定在这些位置。按压释放按钮169以解锁可伸缩把手167,使得第二按钮组163可以相对于第一按钮组161延伸或缩回。在另一实施例中,如图14A最好地描绘的,可以将末端框架部件165设置成向下成角并且从一对可伸缩把手167延伸和缩回的平面偏斜。在另外其它实施例中,末端框架部件165的侧面中的任一个或两个以及可伸缩把手167中的任一个或两个可以设有第一和第二按钮组161、163中的相应一个按钮组(图8)。In the illustrated embodiment of FIG8 , two button groups 161 and 163 are also shown, providing buttons 56 and 60. The first button group 161 is positioned in a fixed position on the support frame 12, adjacent to or adjacent to the end frame member 165. The second button group 163 is positioned on a retractable handle 167, which can be positioned adjacent to the first button group 161. As indicated by the arrows in FIG8 , the retractable handle 167 is movable between a first position, in which the second button group 163 is positioned relatively close to or proximate to the first button group 161, and a second position, in which the second button group 163 extends relatively away from or away from the first button group 161. In one embodiment, the distance between the first and second positions is 225 mm; in other embodiments, the distance can be selected from a range of 120 to 400 mm. It should be understood that the retractable handle 167 is movable between the first and second positions, as well as a plurality of positions therebetween, and can be locked in these positions. Pressing the release button 169 unlocks the retractable handle 167 so that the second button set 163 can be extended or retracted relative to the first button set 161. In another embodiment, as best depicted in FIG14A, the end frame member 165 can be configured to be angled downward and deflected from the plane in which the pair of retractable handles 167 extend and retract. In still other embodiments, either or both of the sides of the end frame member 165 and either or both of the retractable handles 167 can be provided with a respective one of the first and second button sets 161, 163 (FIG. 8).

现在转而参看卧床10被同时致动的实施例,图2的卧床10描绘为延伸的,因而前部致动器传感器62和后部致动器传感器64检测到前部致动器16和后部致动器18处于第一位置,即,前部和后部致动器16、18接触和/或非常接近其相应横向部件63、65,这诸如是在装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40接触下表面并且被装载的时候。当前部和后部致动器传感器62、64检测到前部和后部致动器16、18分别在第一位置并且可以由操作人员使用降低按钮60和升高按钮56降低或升高时,前部和后部致动器16和18都是活动的。Turning now to an embodiment in which the couch 10 is actuated simultaneously, the couch 10 of FIG2 is depicted as being extended so that the front actuator sensor 62 and the rear actuator sensor 64 detect that the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 are in a first position, i.e., the front and rear actuators 16, 18 are in contact with and/or in close proximity to their respective cross members 63, 65, such as when the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 are in contact with a lower surface and loaded. When the front and rear actuator sensors 62, 64 detect that the front and rear actuators 16, 18, respectively, are in the first position and can be lowered or raised by the operator using the lower button 60 and the raise button 56, both the front and rear actuators 16, 18 are active.

同时参照图4A至图4C,示意性地描绘经由同时致动而升高(图4A至图4C)或降低(图4C至图4A)的卧床10的实施例(应注意,出于清楚起见,图4A至图4C中未描绘前部致动器16和后部致动器18)。在描绘的实施例中,卧床10包括支撑框架12,其与一对装载端支腿20和一对控制端支腿40滑动地接合。装载端支腿20中的每一个可旋转地联接到前部铰链部件24,其可旋转地联接到支撑框架12。每个所述控制端支腿40可旋转地联接到后部铰链部件44,所述后部铰链部件可旋转地联接到支撑框架12。在描绘的实施例中,前部铰链部件24朝向支撑框架12的前端17可旋转地联接,并且后部铰链部件44朝向后端19可旋转地联接到支撑框架12。With reference to Figures 4A-4C simultaneously, an embodiment of a cot 10 that is raised (Figures 4A-4C) or lowered (Figures 4C-4A) via simultaneous actuation is schematically depicted (note that, for clarity, the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 are not depicted in Figures 4A-4C). In the depicted embodiment, the cot 10 includes a support frame 12 that is slidably engaged with a pair of loading-end legs 20 and a pair of control-end legs 40. Each of the loading-end legs 20 is rotatably coupled to a front hinge member 24, which is rotatably coupled to the support frame 12. Each of the control-end legs 40 is rotatably coupled to a rear hinge member 44, which is rotatably coupled to the support frame 12. In the depicted embodiment, the front hinge member 24 is rotatably coupled toward the front end 17 of the support frame 12, and the rear hinge member 44 is rotatably coupled to the support frame 12 toward the rear end 19.

图4A描绘处在最低运输位置的卧床10。具体地说,后部转轮46和前部转轮26接触表面,装载端支腿20与支撑框架12滑动地接合,使得装载端支腿20朝向后端19接触支撑框架12的一部分,并且控制端支腿40与支撑框架12滑动地接合,使得控制端支腿40朝向前端17接触支撑框架12的一部分。图4B描绘处在中间运输位置的卧床10,即,装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40沿着支撑框架12存在中间运输位置。图4C描绘处在最高运输位置的卧床10,即,装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40沿着支撑框架12定位成使得前部装载转轮70处在最大期望高度,该高度可以设置成足以装载卧床的高度,如本文中更详细地描述。FIG4A depicts the cot 10 in its lowest transport position. Specifically, the rear wheels 46 and the front wheels 26 are in contact with a surface, the loading-end legs 20 are slidingly engaged with the support frame 12 such that the loading-end legs 20 contact a portion of the support frame 12 toward the rear end 19, and the control-end legs 40 are slidingly engaged with the support frame 12 such that the control-end legs 40 contact a portion of the support frame 12 toward the front end 17. FIG4B depicts the cot 10 in an intermediate transport position, i.e., the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 are in an intermediate transport position along the support frame 12. FIG4C depicts the cot 10 in its highest transport position, i.e., the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 are positioned along the support frame 12 such that the front loading wheels 70 are at a maximum desired height, which can be set to a height sufficient for loading the cot, as described in more detail herein.

本文所述的实施例可以用于将患者从运输工具下方的位置抬升起来,以准备将患者装载到运输工具中(例如从地面到救护车的装载表面上方)。具体地说,通过同时致动装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40并且使其沿着支撑框架12滑动,借此可以将卧床10从最低运输位置(图4A)升高到中间运输位置(图4B)或最高运输位置(图4C)。当被升高时,致动使得装载端支腿朝向前端17滑动并围绕前部铰链部件24旋转,并且使得控制端支腿40朝向后端19滑动并围绕后部铰链部件44旋转。具体地说,用户可以与操作人员控件57(图8)交互,并且提供指示升高卧床10的需要的输入(例如通过按压升高按钮56)。卧床10从其当前位置(例如最低运输位置或中间运输位置)一直升高到它到达最高运输位置为止。当到达最高运输位置时,致动可以自动停止,即,要升高卧床10就需要更高的额外输入。可以用任何方式诸如电子地、有声地或手动地向卧床10和/或操作人员控件57提供输入。The embodiments described herein can be used to raise a patient from a position below a transport vehicle in preparation for loading the patient into the transport vehicle (e.g., from the ground to above the loading surface of an ambulance). Specifically, the bed 10 can be raised from a lowest transport position ( FIG. 4A ) to an intermediate transport position ( FIG. 4B ) or a highest transport position ( FIG. 4C ) by simultaneously actuating the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 and sliding them along the support frame 12 . When being raised, actuation causes the loading-end legs to slide toward the front end 17 and rotate about the front hinge member 24 , and causes the control-end legs 40 to slide toward the rear end 19 and rotate about the rear hinge member 44 . Specifically, a user can interact with the operator controls 57 ( FIG. 8 ) and provide input indicating the need to raise the bed 10 (e.g., by pressing the raise button 56 ). The bed 10 is raised from its current position (e.g., the lowest transport position or the intermediate transport position) until it reaches the highest transport position. When the uppermost transport position is reached, actuation may stop automatically, ie, further additional input is required to raise the bed 10. Input may be provided to the bed 10 and/or operator controls 57 in any manner, such as electronically, audibly, or manually.

通过同时致动装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40并且使其沿着支撑框架12滑动,借此可以将卧床10从中间运输位置(图4B)或最高运输位置(图4C)降低到最低运输位置(图4A)。具体地说,当降低时,致动使得装载端支腿朝向后端19滑动并围绕前部铰链部件24旋转,并且使得控制端支腿40朝向前端17滑动并围绕后部铰链部件44旋转。例如,用户可以提供指示降低卧床10的需要的输入(例如通过按压降低按钮60)。当接收到输入时,卧床10从其当前位置(例如最高运输位置或中间运输位置)一直降低到它达到最低运输位置为止。一旦卧床10到达其最低高度(例如最低运输位置),致动可以自动停止。在一些实施例中,控制匣50提供装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40在移动期间活动的视觉指示。The couch 10 can be lowered from the intermediate transport position ( FIG. 4B ) or the highest transport position ( FIG. 4C ) to the lowest transport position ( FIG. 4A ) by simultaneously actuating the loading-end leg 20 and the control-end leg 40 and causing them to slide along the support frame 12. Specifically, when lowering, the actuation causes the loading-end leg to slide toward the rear end 19 and rotate about the front hinge member 24, and causes the control-end leg 40 to slide toward the front end 17 and rotate about the rear hinge member 44. For example, the user can provide input indicating the need to lower the couch 10 (e.g., by pressing the lower button 60). When the input is received, the couch 10 is lowered from its current position (e.g., the highest transport position or the intermediate transport position) until it reaches the lowest transport position. Once the couch 10 reaches its lowest height (e.g., the lowest transport position), the actuation can automatically cease. In some embodiments, the control box 50 provides a visual indication of the activity of the loading-end leg 20 and the control-end leg 40 during movement.

在一个实施例中,当卧床10处于最高运输位置(图4C)时,装载端支腿20在前部装载标位221处接触支撑框架12,并且控制端支腿40在后部装载标位241处接触支撑框架12。虽然图4C中描绘前部装载标位221和后部装载标位241的位置靠近支撑框架12的中间,但是可以设想另外的实施例,其中前部装载标位221和后部装载标位241位于沿着支撑框架12的任何位置。例如,通过将卧床10致动到期望高度并且提供指示设置最高运输位置的需要的输入(例如,同时按压“+”和“-”按钮56、60并保持10秒),可以设置最高运输位置。In one embodiment, when the sleeper 10 is in the uppermost transport position ( FIG. 4C ), the loading-end legs 20 contact the support frame 12 at the front loading index 221, and the control-end legs 40 contact the support frame 12 at the rear loading index 241. Although FIG. 4C depicts the front loading index 221 and the rear loading index 241 as being located near the middle of the support frame 12, alternative embodiments are contemplated in which the front loading index 221 and the rear loading index 241 are located anywhere along the support frame 12. For example, the uppermost transport position can be set by actuating the sleeper 10 to a desired height and providing input indicating the need to set the uppermost transport position (e.g., pressing and holding the “+” and “-” buttons 56, 60 simultaneously for 10 seconds).

在另一实施例中,每当卧床10被升高到最高运输位置以上达到所设置的时间段(例如30秒)时,控制匣50就提供卧床10已经超出最高运输位置并且卧床10需要降低的指示。该指示可以是视觉指示、听觉指示、电子指示或其组合。In another embodiment, each time the couch 10 is raised above the uppermost transport position for a set period of time (e.g., 30 seconds), the control box 50 provides an indication that the couch 10 has exceeded the uppermost transport position and needs to be lowered. The indication may be a visual indication, an audible indication, an electronic indication, or a combination thereof.

当卧床10处于最低运输位置(图3A)时,装载端支腿20可以在位置靠近支撑框架12的后端19的前部平坦标位220接触支撑框架12,并且控制端支腿40可以在位置靠近支撑框架12的前端17的后部平坦标位240接触支撑框架12。此外,应注意,本文所使用的术语“标位(index)”意思是指沿着支撑框架12的对应于机械止动器或电止动器的位置,诸如例如侧面部件15中形成的通道中的阻挡物、锁定机构或受到伺服机构控制的止动器。When the sleeper bed 10 is in the lowest transport position ( FIG. 3A ), the loading-end leg 20 may contact the support frame 12 at a forward, flat index 220 located proximate the rear end 19 of the support frame 12, and the control-end leg 40 may contact the support frame 12 at a rearward, flat index 240 located proximate the front end 17 of the support frame 12. Furthermore, it should be noted that the term “index” as used herein means a position along the support frame 12 that corresponds to a mechanical or electrical stop, such as, for example, a block in a channel formed in the side member 15, a locking mechanism, or a servo-controlled stop.

前部致动器16可操作以独立于后部致动器18升高或降低支撑框架12的前端17。后部致动器18可操作以独立于前部致动器16升高或降低支撑框架12的后端19。通过独立地抬高前端17或后端19,当卧床10在不平坦的表面(例如台阶或斜坡)上移动时,卧床10能够将支撑框架12保持水平或基本上水平。具体地说,如果前部致动器16或后部致动器18中的一个相对于第一位置处于第二位置,则不接触表面的该组支腿(即,受拉的该组支腿,诸如当卧床的一端或一端被抬升时)受到卧床10激活(例如将卧床10从路缘上移开)。卧床10的其它实施例可操作以自动调成水平状态。例如,如果后端19比前端17低,则按压“+”按钮56会在升高卧床10之前先将后端19升高到水平位置,并且按压“-”按钮60会在降低卧床10之前先将前端17降低到水平位置。The front actuator 16 is operable to raise or lower the front end 17 of the support frame 12 independently of the rear actuator 18. The rear actuator 18 is operable to raise or lower the rear end 19 of the support frame 12 independently of the front actuator 16. By independently raising the front end 17 or the rear end 19, the sleeper 10 is able to maintain the support frame 12 level or substantially level when the sleeper 10 is moved over an uneven surface, such as steps or a ramp. Specifically, if one of the front actuator 16 or the rear actuator 18 is in a second position relative to the first position, the set of legs that are not in contact with the surface (i.e., the set of legs that are in tension, such as when one or both ends of the sleeper are raised) is activated by the sleeper 10 (e.g., to move the sleeper 10 away from a curb). Other embodiments of the sleeper 10 are operable to automatically adjust to a level position. For example, if the rear end 19 is lower than the front end 17, pressing the "+" button 56 will raise the rear end 19 to a horizontal position before raising the bed 10, and pressing the "-" button 60 will lower the front end 17 to a horizontal position before lowering the bed 10.

在图2中描绘的一个实施例中,卧床10从前部致动器传感器62接收指示前部致动器16的检测到的位置的第一位置信号,并从后部致动器传感器64接收指示后部致动器18的检测到的位置的第二位置信号。第一位置信号和第二位置信号可以通过控制匣50执行的逻辑处理,以确定卧床10对于卧床10接收到的输入的响应。具体地说,用户输入可以输入到控制匣50中。接收到用户输入作为指示控制匣50让改变卧床10的高度的命令的控制信号。大体而言,当第一位置信号指示前部致动器处于第一位置并且第二位置信号指示后部致动器处于相对不同于第一位置的第二位置时(第一和第二位置指示两个预定相对位置之间的距离、角度或位置),前部致动器致动装载端支腿20并且后部致动器18基本上保持静止(例如不被致动)。因此,当仅仅第一位置信号指示第二位置时,通过按压“-”按钮60可以升高装载端支腿20和/或通过按压“+”按钮56可以降低装载端支腿20。大体而言,当第二位置信号指示第二位置并且第一位置信号指示第一位置时,后部致动器18致动控制端支腿40并且前部致动器16保持基本上静止(例如不被致动)。因此,当仅仅第二位置信号指示第二位置时,通过按压“-”按钮60可以升高控制端支腿40和/或通过按压“+”按钮56可以降低控制端支腿40。在一些实施例中,致动器可以在初始移动后相对缓慢地致动(即,慢启动)以在相对快速地致动之前先减轻对支撑框架12的快速推撞。In one embodiment depicted in FIG. 2 , the couch 10 receives a first position signal from the front actuator sensor 62 indicating the detected position of the front actuator 16 and a second position signal from the rear actuator sensor 64 indicating the detected position of the rear actuator 18. The first and second position signals may be processed by logic executed by the control pod 50 to determine the couch 10's response to input received by the couch 10. Specifically, user input may be input into the control pod 50. The user input is received as a control signal instructing the control pod 50 to change the height of the couch 10. Generally speaking, when the first position signal indicates that the front actuator is in a first position and the second position signal indicates that the rear actuator is in a second position relative to the first position (the first and second positions indicating a distance, angle, or position between two predetermined relative positions), the front actuator actuates the loading-end legs 20 and the rear actuator 18 remains substantially stationary (e.g., not actuated). Thus, when only the first position signal indicates the second position, the loading-end leg 20 can be raised by pressing the “-” button 60 and/or lowered by pressing the “+” button 56. Generally speaking, when the second position signal indicates the second position and the first position signal indicates the first position, the rear actuator 18 actuates the control-end leg 40 and the front actuator 16 remains substantially stationary (e.g., not actuated). Thus, when only the second position signal indicates the second position, the control-end leg 40 can be raised by pressing the “-” button 60 and/or lowered by pressing the “+” button 56. In some embodiments, the actuators can be actuated relatively slowly after initial movement (i.e., a slow start) to mitigate rapid jostling of the support frame 12 before actuating relatively quickly.

同时参照图4C至图5E,本文所述的实施例可以使用独立致动将患者装载到运输工具中(应注意,出于清楚起见,图4C至图5E中未描绘前部致动器16和后部致动器18)。具体地说,可以根据下文描述的过程将卧床10装载到装载表面500上。首先,可以将卧床10放置成最高运输位置(图3),或者前部装载转轮70所处的高度大于装载表面500的任何位置。当将卧床10装载到装载表面500上时,可以经由前部和后部致动器16和18升高卧床10以确保前部装载转轮70安置于装载表面500上方。在一些实施例中,前部致动器16和后部致动器18可以同时致动以将卧床一直保持水平,直到卧床的高度处在预定位置为止。一旦达到预定高度,前部致动器16可以升高前端17,使得卧床10在其最高装载位置成角度。因此,卧床10可以装载成后端19比前端17低。接着,卧床10可以一直降低到前部装载转轮70接触装载表面500(图5A)为止。With reference to both Figures 4C through 5E , embodiments described herein can utilize independent actuation to load a patient into a transport vehicle (note that, for clarity, the front actuator 16 and rear actuator 18 are not depicted in Figures 4C through 5E ). Specifically, the couch 10 can be loaded onto the loading surface 500 according to the process described below. First, the couch 10 can be placed in its highest transport position (Figure 3), or any position where the front loading wheels 70 are positioned at a height greater than the loading surface 500. When loading the couch 10 onto the loading surface 500, the couch 10 can be raised via the front and rear actuators 16 and 18 to ensure that the front loading wheels 70 are positioned above the loading surface 500. In some embodiments, the front and rear actuators 16, 18 can be actuated simultaneously to maintain the couch level until the couch reaches a predetermined height. Once the predetermined height is reached, the front actuator 16 can raise the front end 17, causing the couch 10 to angle in its highest loading position. Thus, the cot 10 can be loaded with the rear end 19 lower than the front end 17. The cot 10 can then be lowered until the front loading wheels 70 contact the loading surface 500 (FIG. 5A).

如图5A中描绘的,前部装载转轮70在装载表面500上方。在一个实施例中,在装载转轮接触装载表面500之后,可以用前部致动器16致动该对装载端支腿20,因为前端17在装载表面500上方。如图5A和图5B中所描绘,卧床10的中间部分离开装载表面500(即,卧床10的足够大的部分尚未被装载超出装载边缘502,从而使得卧床10的大部分重量可以悬空并且受到转轮70、26和/或30支撑)。当前部装载转轮受到足够的负载时,可以用更少量的力将卧床10保持水平。此外,在该位置中,前部致动器16相对于第一位置处于第二位置,并且后部致动器18相对于第二位置处于第一位置。因此,例如,如果“-”按钮60被激活,则装载端支腿20升高(图5B)。在一个实施例中,在装载端支腿20已经升高到足以触发装载状态之后,前部致动器16和后部致动器18的操作取决于自致动卧床的位置。在一些实施例中,当装载端支腿20升高时,在控制匣50的视觉显示组件或GUI 58上提供视觉指示(图2)。视觉指示可以用颜色编码(例如,激活的支腿是绿色,未激活的支腿是红色)。当装载端支腿20已经完全缩回时,这个前部致动器16可以自动停止操作。此外,应注意,在装载端支腿20缩回过程中,前部致动器传感器62可能相对于第一位置检测到第二位置,这个时候,前部致动器16可以用更快的速度升高装载端支腿20;例如在大约2秒内完全缩回。As depicted in FIG5A , the front loading wheels 70 are above the loading surface 500. In one embodiment, after the loading wheels contact the loading surface 500, the pair of loading-end legs 20 can be actuated using the front actuator 16 because the front end 17 is above the loading surface 500. As depicted in FIG5A and FIG5B , the middle portion of the cot 10 is clear of the loading surface 500 (i.e., a sufficiently large portion of the cot 10 has not yet been loaded beyond the loading edge 502 such that the majority of the weight of the cot 10 can be suspended and supported by the wheels 70, 26, and/or 30). When the front loading wheels are sufficiently loaded, the cot 10 can be maintained level with a reduced amount of force. Furthermore, in this position, the front actuator 16 is in the second position relative to the first position, and the rear actuator 18 is in the first position relative to the second position. Thus, for example, if the "-" button 60 is activated, the loading-end legs 20 are raised ( FIG5B ). In one embodiment, after the loading-end legs 20 have been raised sufficiently to trigger the loading state, the operation of the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 is dependent on the position of the self-actuated bed. In some embodiments, a visual indication is provided on the visual display assembly or GUI 58 of the control pod 50 ( FIG. 2 ) when the loading-end legs 20 are raised. The visual indication can be color-coded (e.g., green for activated legs and red for inactivated legs). The front actuator 16 can automatically cease operation when the loading-end legs 20 have fully retracted. Furthermore, it should be noted that during the retraction of the loading-end legs 20, the front actuator sensor 62 may detect a second position relative to the first position, at which point the front actuator 16 can raise the loading-end legs 20 at a faster rate; for example, fully retracting them in approximately two seconds.

同时参照图3、图5B和图7,在前部装载转轮70已经装载在装载表面500上以辅助将卧床10装载到装载表面500上之后,一个或多个处理器100可以自动致动后部致动器18。具体地说,当前部角度传感器66检测到前部角度αf小于预定角度时,一个或多个处理器100可以自动致动后部致动器18以延伸控制端支腿40并将卧床10的后端19升高成高于原始装载高度。预定角度可以是任何指示装载状态或延伸百分比的角度,诸如例如在一个实施例中是小于装载端支腿20的延伸的约10%,或在另一个实施例中是小于装载端支腿20的延伸的约5%。在一些实施例中,在自动致动后部致动器18以延伸控制端支腿40之前,一个或多个处理器100可以确定装载端传感器76是否指示前部装载转轮70在触摸装载表面500。Referring simultaneously to FIG3 , FIG5B , and FIG7 , after the front loading wheel 70 has been positioned on the loading surface 500 to assist in loading the cot 10 onto the loading surface 500, the one or more processors 100 can automatically actuate the rear actuator 18. Specifically, when the front angle sensor 66 detects that the front angle αf is less than a predetermined angle, the one or more processors 100 can automatically actuate the rear actuator 18 to extend the control-end legs 40 and raise the rear end 19 of the cot 10 above the original loading height. The predetermined angle can be any angle indicative of a loading state or percentage of extension, such as, for example, less than approximately 10% of the extension of the loading-end legs 20 in one embodiment, or less than approximately 5% of the extension of the loading-end legs 20 in another embodiment. In some embodiments, before automatically actuating the rear actuator 18 to extend the control-end legs 40, the one or more processors 100 can determine whether the loading-end sensor 76 indicates that the front loading wheel 70 is touching the loading surface 500.

在另外的实施例中,一个或多个处理器100可以监视后部角度传感器68以证实后部角度αb在根据后部致动器18的致动而改变。为了保护后部致动器18,如果后部角度αb指示操作不当的话,一个或多个处理器100可以自动中止后部致动器18的致动。例如,如果后部角度αb在预定量的时间(例如大约200ms)中未能变化,则一个或多个处理器100可以自动中止后部致动器18的致动。In another embodiment, the one or more processors 100 can monitor the rear angle sensor 68 to confirm that the rear angle αb is changing in response to actuation of the rear actuator 18. To protect the rear actuator 18, if the rear angle αb indicates improper operation, the one or more processors 100 can automatically suspend actuation of the rear actuator 18. For example, if the rear angle αb fails to change within a predetermined amount of time (e.g., approximately 200 ms), the one or more processors 100 can automatically suspend actuation of the rear actuator 18.

同时参照图5A至图5E,在装载端支腿20已经缩回之后,卧床10可以被向前推动,直到中间装载转轮30已经装载到装载表面500上(图5C)为止。如图5C中所描绘,卧床10的前端17和中间部分在装载表面500上方。因此,该对控制端支腿40可以随着后部致动器18缩回。具体地说,超声波传感器可以定位成检测何时中间部分在装载表面500上方。当装载状态期间中间部分在装载表面500上方(例如,装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40具有大于装载状态角度的角度Δ)时,后部致动器可以致动。在一个实施例中,当中间装载转轮30足够超出装载边缘502以容许控制端支腿40的致动时,控制匣50(图2)可以提供指示(例如可以提供音频蜂鸣声)。Referring simultaneously to Figures 5A-5E , after the loading-end legs 20 have been retracted, the couch 10 can be pushed forward until the intermediate loading wheels 30 have been loaded onto the loading surface 500 (Figure 5C). As depicted in Figure 5C, the front end 17 and the middle portion of the couch 10 are above the loading surface 500. Therefore, the pair of control-end legs 40 can be retracted along with the rear actuator 18. Specifically, an ultrasonic sensor can be positioned to detect when the middle portion is above the loading surface 500. When the middle portion is above the loading surface 500 during the loading state (e.g., the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 have an angle Δ greater than the loading state angle), the rear actuator can be actuated. In one embodiment, the control box 50 (Figure 2) can provide an indication (e.g., an audible beep) when the intermediate loading wheels 30 are sufficiently beyond the loading edge 502 to permit actuation of the control-end legs 40.

应注意,卧床10的中间部分在装载表面500上方,此时卧床10的任何可以充当支点的部分充分超出装载边缘502使得控制端支腿40可以缩回,抬升后端19需要的的力的量减少(例如可以装载的卧床10的重量的小于一半需要支撑在后端19)。此外,应注意,通过位于卧床10上的传感器和/或位于装载表面500上或邻近于装载表面500的传感器可以实现对卧床10的位置的检测。例如,救护车可具有传感器,该传感器检测卧床10相对于装载表面500和/或装载边缘502的定位,并且具有通信装置以向卧床10传输信息。It should be noted that the middle portion of the cot 10 is above the loading surface 500, and any portion of the cot 10 that could serve as a fulcrum is sufficiently beyond the loading edge 502 so that the control-end legs 40 can be retracted, reducing the amount of force required to lift the rear end 19 (e.g., less than half of the weight of the loaded cot 10 needs to be supported on the rear end 19). Furthermore, it should be noted that the position of the cot 10 can be detected by sensors located on the cot 10 and/or sensors located on or adjacent to the loading surface 500. For example, an ambulance may have sensors that detect the position of the cot 10 relative to the loading surface 500 and/or the loading edge 502, and have communication means to transmit this information to the cot 10.

参看图5D,在控制端支腿40缩回之后,卧床10可以被向前推动。在一个实施例中,在后部支腿缩回期间,后部致动器传感器64可以检测控制端支腿40未负载,这个时候,后部致动器18可以用更高的速度升高控制端支腿40。当控制端支腿40完全缩回时,后部致动器18可以自动停止操作。在一个实施例中,当卧床10足够超出装载边缘502(例如满载或者装载成使得后部致动器超出装载边缘502)时,控制匣50(图2)可以提供指示。5D , after the console legs 40 are retracted, the cot 10 can be pushed forward. In one embodiment, during the retraction of the rear legs, the rear actuator sensor 64 can detect that the console legs 40 are unloaded, at which point the rear actuator 18 can raise the console legs 40 at a higher speed. When the console legs 40 are fully retracted, the rear actuator 18 can automatically stop operating. In one embodiment, the control box 50 ( FIG. 2 ) can provide an indication when the cot 10 is sufficiently extended beyond the loading edge 502 (e.g., fully loaded or loaded such that the rear actuator extends beyond the loading edge 502).

一旦卧床装载到装载表面(图5E)上,通过可释放地锁定/联接到救护车,可以将前部和后部致动器16、18解除激活。救护车和卧床10可以各自配有适合于联接的组件,例如阳-阴型连接件。此外,卧床10可包括传感器,该传感器寄存何时卧床完全安置在救护车中,并且发送信号,该信号使得致动器16、18锁定。在又一实施例中,卧床10可以连接到卧床紧固件,其锁定致动器16、18,并且进一步联接到救护车的电源系统,该电源系统为卧床10充电。这些救护车充电系统的商用例子是Ferno-Washington,Inc生产的集成式充电系统(ICS)。Once the bed is loaded onto the loading surface (FIG. 5E), the front and rear actuators 16, 18 can be deactivated by releasably locking/coupling to the ambulance. The ambulance and bed 10 can each be equipped with components suitable for coupling, such as male-female type connectors. In addition, the bed 10 can include a sensor that registers when the bed is fully positioned in the ambulance and sends a signal that causes the actuators 16, 18 to lock. In yet another embodiment, the bed 10 can be connected to a bed fastener that locks the actuators 16, 18 and is further coupled to the ambulance's power system, which charges the bed 10. A commercial example of such an ambulance charging system is the Integrated Charging System (ICS) produced by Ferno-Washington, Inc.

同时参照图5A至图5E,本文所述的实施例可以使用如上所述的独立致动从装载表面500卸载卧床10。具体地说,卧床10可以从紧固件解锁并且被朝向装载边缘502推动(图5E到图5D)。当从装载表面500(图5D)释放后部转轮46时,后部致动器传感器64检测控制端支腿40未负载并且允许降低控制端支腿40。在一些实施例中,可以防止控制端支腿40降低,例如如果传感器检测到卧床不在正确的位置(例如,后部转轮46在装载表面500上方,或者中间装载转轮30远离装载边缘502)。在一个实施例中,当后部致动器18激活(例如中间装载转轮30靠近装载边缘502和/或后部致动器传感器64检测到相对于第一位置的第二位置)时,控制匣50(图2)可以提供指示。Referring concurrently to Figures 5A-5E , embodiments described herein can unload the couch 10 from the loading surface 500 using independent actuation as described above. Specifically, the couch 10 can be unlocked from the fasteners and pushed toward the loading edge 502 (Figures 5E-5D). When the rear wheels 46 are released from the loading surface 500 (Figure 5D), the rear actuator sensors 64 detect that the control-end legs 40 are unloaded and allow the control-end legs 40 to be lowered. In some embodiments, the control-end legs 40 can be prevented from being lowered, for example, if a sensor detects that the couch is not in the correct position (e.g., the rear wheels 46 are above the loading surface 500, or the intermediate loading wheels 30 are away from the loading edge 502). In one embodiment, the control pod 50 (Figure 2) can provide an indication when the rear actuator 18 is activated (e.g., the intermediate loading wheels 30 are near the loading edge 502 and/or the rear actuator sensors 64 detect a second position relative to the first position).

同时参照图5D和图7,一个或多个处理器可以自动致动线指示器74以在装载表面500上投射一条线,指示卧床10的平衡中心。在一个实施例中,一个或多个处理器100可以从中间负载传感器77接收指示中间装载转轮30与装载表面接触的输入。一个或多个处理器100还可以从后部致动器传感器64接收指示后部致动器18相对于第一位置处于第二位置的输入。当中间装载转轮30接触装载表面并且后部致动器18相对于第一位置处于第二位置时,一个或多个处理器可以自动使线指示器74投射该线。因此,当投射该线时,可以在装载表面上向操作人员提供视觉指示,该视觉指示可以用作装载、卸载或这两个操作的参考。具体地说,当该线趋近装载边缘502时,操作人员可以放慢卧床10从装载表面500的移除,这样可以允许额外的时间来降低控制端支腿40。该操作可以使操作人员支撑卧床10的重量所需要的时间量最小化。Referring to FIG. 5D and FIG. 7 simultaneously, the one or more processors can automatically activate the line indicator 74 to project a line on the loading surface 500 indicating the center of balance of the sleeper 10. In one embodiment, the one or more processors 100 can receive input from the intermediate load sensor 77 indicating that the intermediate loading wheel 30 is in contact with the loading surface. The one or more processors 100 can also receive input from the rear actuator sensor 64 indicating that the rear actuator 18 is in a second position relative to the first position. When the intermediate loading wheel 30 is in contact with the loading surface and the rear actuator 18 is in the second position relative to the first position, the one or more processors can automatically cause the line indicator 74 to project the line. Thus, when the line is projected, a visual indication can be provided to the operator on the loading surface, which can be used as a reference for loading, unloading, or both operations. Specifically, when the line approaches the loading edge 502, the operator can slow down the removal of the sleeper 10 from the loading surface 500, thereby allowing additional time to lower the control end legs 40. This action can minimize the amount of time the operator needs to support the weight of the sleeper 10.

同时参照图5A至图5E,当卧床10相对于装载边缘502恰当地定位时,控制端支腿40可以延伸(图5C)。在一些实施例中,当后部致动器传感器64检测到相对于第一位置的第二位置时,可以通过打开逻辑阀352以激活再生流体路径350而使控制端支腿40相对快速地延伸(图12A至图12D)。例如,通过按压“+”按钮56可以延伸控制端支腿40。在一个实施例中,当控制端支腿40降低时,在控制匣50的视觉显示组件或GUI58上提供视觉指示(图2)。例如,当卧床10处于装载状态并且控制端支腿40和/或装载端支腿20被致动时,可以提供视觉指示。此视觉指示可以用信号通知在致动期间卧床不应当移动(例如,牵拉、推动或滚动)。当控制端支腿40接触底板(图5C)时,控制端支腿40变得负载,并且后部致动器传感器64解除后部致动器18的激活。5A-5E , when the couch 10 is properly positioned relative to the loading edge 502, the control-end legs 40 can be extended ( FIG. 5C ). In some embodiments, when the rear actuator sensor 64 detects a second position relative to the first position, the control-end legs 40 can be relatively quickly extended by opening the logic valve 352 to activate the regeneration fluid path 350 ( FIG. 12A-12D ). For example, the control-end legs 40 can be extended by pressing the "+" button 56. In one embodiment, a visual indication is provided on the visual display assembly or GUI 58 of the control cassette 50 when the control-end legs 40 are lowered ( FIG. 2 ). For example, a visual indication can be provided when the couch 10 is in the loading state and the control-end legs 40 and/or the loading-end legs 20 are actuated. This visual indication can signal that the couch should not be moved (e.g., pulled, pushed, or rolled) during actuation. When the control end leg 40 contacts the floor ( FIG. 5C ), the control end leg 40 becomes loaded and the rear actuator sensor 64 deactivates the rear actuator 18 .

当传感器检测到装载端支腿20不接触装载表面500(图5B)时,前部致动器16被激活。在一些实施例中,当前部致动器传感器62检测到相对于第一位置的第二位置时,装载端支腿20可以通过打开逻辑阀352以激活再生流体路径350而相对快速地延伸(图12A至图12D)。在一个实施例中,当中间装载转轮30处在装载边缘502时,控制匣50可以提供指示(图2)。装载端支腿20延伸到装载端支腿20接触底板为止(图5A)。例如,通过按压“+”按钮56可以延伸装载端支腿20。在一个实施例中,当装载端支腿20降低时,在控制匣50的视觉显示组件或GUI 58上提供视觉指示(图2)。When the sensor detects that the loading-end legs 20 are not in contact with the loading surface 500 ( FIG. 5B ), the front actuator 16 is activated. In some embodiments, when the front actuator sensor 62 detects a second position relative to the first position, the loading-end legs 20 can be relatively quickly extended by opening the logic valve 352 to activate the regeneration fluid path 350 ( FIG. 12A - FIG. 12D ). In one embodiment, the control pod 50 can provide an indication when the intermediate loading wheel 30 is at the loading edge 502 ( FIG. 2 ). The loading-end legs 20 are extended until they contact the base plate ( FIG. 5A ). For example, the loading-end legs 20 can be extended by pressing the "+" button 56. In one embodiment, a visual indication is provided on the visual display assembly or GUI 58 of the control pod 50 when the loading-end legs 20 are lowered ( FIG. 2 ).

同时参照图7和图8,任何操作人员控件57的致动可以使一个或多个处理器100接收到控制信号。控制信号可以经过编码以指示操作人员控件中的一个或多个已致动。经过编码的控制信号可以与预编程的卧床功能相关联。当接收到经过编码的控制信号时,一个或多个处理器100可以自动执行卧床功能。在一些实施例中,卧床功能可以包括开门功能,其向运输工具传输开门信号。具体地说,卧床10可以包括通信电路82,其通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。通信电路82可以被配置成与诸如例如救护车等等的运输工具交换通信信号。通信电路82可以包括无线通信装置,例如(但不限于)个人局域网收发器、局域网收发器、射频识别(RFID)、红外发射器、蜂窝式收发器等等。7 and 8 , actuation of any operator control 57 can cause one or more processors 100 to receive a control signal. The control signal can be encoded to indicate that one or more of the operator controls has been actuated. The encoded control signal can be associated with a preprogrammed bed function. Upon receiving the encoded control signal, the one or more processors 100 can automatically execute the bed function. In some embodiments, the bed function can include a door opening function that transmits a door opening signal to a vehicle. Specifically, the bed 10 can include a communication circuit 82 that is communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100. The communication circuit 82 can be configured to exchange communication signals with a vehicle, such as an ambulance. The communication circuit 82 can include a wireless communication device, such as, but not limited to, a personal area network transceiver, a local area network transceiver, a radio frequency identification (RFID), an infrared transmitter, a cellular transceiver, and the like.

操作人员控件57中的一个或多个的控制信号可以与开门功能相关联。当接收到与开门功能相关联的控制信号时,一个或多个处理器100可以使通信电路82向在开门信号范围内的运输工具传输开门信号。当接收到开门信号时,运输工具可以打开门以便接收卧床10。此外,开门信号可以经过编码以诸如例如经由分类、唯一识别符等等识别卧床10。在另外的实施例中,操作人员控件57中的一个或多个的控制信号可以与关门功能相关联,关门功能的操作方式与开门功能类似,并且使运输工具的门关闭。The control signal from one or more of the operator controls 57 can be associated with a door opening function. Upon receiving a control signal associated with the door opening function, the one or more processors 100 can cause the communication circuit 82 to transmit a door opening signal to any vehicle within range of the door opening signal. Upon receiving the door opening signal, the vehicle can open its door to receive the cot 10. Furthermore, the door opening signal can be encoded to identify the cot 10, such as via a classification, a unique identifier, or the like. In another embodiment, the control signal from one or more of the operator controls 57 can be associated with a door closing function, which operates similarly to the door opening function and causes the vehicle's door to close.

同时参照图3、图7和图8,卧床功能可以包括自动调平功能,其自动相对于重力将前端17和后端19调平。因此,可以自动调整前部角度αf、后部角度αb或这两个角度以补偿不平坦的地形。例如,如果后端19相对于重力比前端17低,则后端19可以自动升高以相对于重力将卧床10调平,前端17可以自动降低以相对于重力将卧床10调平,或者这两种操作。相反,如果后端19相对于重力比前端17高,则后端19可以自动降低以相对于重力调平卧床10,前端17可以自动升高以相对于重力调平卧床10,或者这两种操作。3 , 7 , and 8 , the bed's functions may include an automatic leveling function that automatically levels the front end 17 and rear end 19 relative to gravity. Thus, the front angle αf , the rear angle αb , or both angles can be automatically adjusted to compensate for uneven terrain. For example, if the rear end 19 is lower than the front end 17 relative to gravity, the rear end 19 can automatically rise to level the bed 10 relative to gravity, the front end 17 can automatically lower to level the bed 10 relative to gravity, or both. Conversely, if the rear end 19 is higher than the front end 17 relative to gravity, the rear end 19 can automatically lower to level the bed 10 relative to gravity, the front end 17 can automatically raise to level the bed 10 relative to gravity, or both.

同时参照图2和图7,卧床10可以包括重力参考传感器80,其被配置成提供指示地球参考系的重力参考信号。重力参考传感器80可以包括加速计、陀螺仪、倾角仪等等。重力参考传感器80可以通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100,并且在适合于检测卧床10相对于重力(诸如例如支撑框架12)的水平的位置联接到卧床10。2 and 7 , the couch 10 may include a gravity reference sensor 80 configured to provide a gravity reference signal indicative of an Earth reference frame. The gravity reference sensor 80 may include an accelerometer, a gyroscope, an inclinometer, and the like. The gravity reference sensor 80 may be communicatively coupled to the one or more processors 100 and coupled to the couch 10 at a location suitable for detecting the level of the couch 10 relative to gravity (such as, for example, the support frame 12).

操作人员控件57中的一个或多个的控制信号可以与自动调平功能相关联。具体地说,任何操作人员控件57都可以传输与启用或停用自动调平功能相关联的控制信号。或者或另外,其它卧床功能可以选择性地启用或停用卧床调平功能。当启用自动调平功能时,一个或多个处理器100可以接收到重力参考信号。一个或多个处理器100可以自动将重力参考信号与指示地球水平的地球参考系比较。基于所述比较,一个或多个处理器100可以自动量化地球参考系与重力参考信号指示的卧床10的当前水平之间的差异。所述差异可以转换为期望调节量以相对于重力调平卧床10的前端17和后端19。例如,该差异可以转换为对前部角度αf、后部角度αb或这两个角度的角度调节。因此,一个或多个处理器100可以自动致动致动器16、18,直到已实现期望的调节量为止,即,可以使用前部角度传感器66、后部角度传感器68和重力参考传感器80进行反馈。Control signals from one or more of the operator controls 57 can be associated with the automatic leveling function. Specifically, any operator control 57 can transmit a control signal associated with activating or deactivating the automatic leveling function. Alternatively or additionally, other bed functions can selectively activate or deactivate the bed leveling function. When the automatic leveling function is activated, the one or more processors 100 can receive a gravity reference signal. The one or more processors 100 can automatically compare the gravity reference signal with a terrestrial reference system indicating the level of the Earth. Based on this comparison, the one or more processors 100 can automatically quantify the difference between the terrestrial reference system and the current level of the bed 10 indicated by the gravity reference signal. This difference can be converted into a desired adjustment to level the front end 17 and rear end 19 of the bed 10 relative to gravity. For example, this difference can be converted into an angular adjustment to the front angle α f , the rear angle α b , or both angles. Accordingly, the one or more processors 100 can automatically actuate the actuators 16 and 18 until the desired adjustment is achieved, i.e., feedback can be provided using the front angle sensor 66 , the rear angle sensor 68 , and the gravity reference sensor 80 .

同时参照图1、图9和图10,前部转轮26和后部转轮46中的一个或多个可以包括用于自动致动的转轮组合件110。因此,虽然图9中描绘的转轮组合件110联接到连杆27,但是转轮组合件可以联接到连杆47。转轮组合件110可以包括转轮导向模块112,用于相对于卧床10引导转轮114的朝向。转轮转向模块112可以包括:控制轴杆116,其限定用于导向的旋转轴118;转向机构90,用于致动控制轴杆116;以及叉形物121,其限定用于转轮114的旋转轴123。在一些实施例中,控制轴杆116可以可旋转地联接到连杆27,使得控制轴杆116围绕旋转轴118旋转。通过位于控制轴杆116与连杆27之间的轴承124可以促进旋转运动。Referring simultaneously to FIG1 , FIG9 , and FIG10 , one or more of the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 may include a wheel assembly 110 for automatic actuation. Thus, while the wheel assembly 110 depicted in FIG9 is coupled to the connecting rod 27 , the wheel assembly may be coupled to the connecting rod 47 . The wheel assembly 110 may include a wheel steering module 112 for guiding the orientation of the wheels 114 relative to the bed 10 . The wheel steering module 112 may include a control shaft 116 defining a rotational axis 118 for steering; a steering mechanism 90 for actuating the control shaft 116; and a fork 121 defining a rotational axis 123 for the wheels 114 . In some embodiments, the control shaft 116 may be rotatably coupled to the connecting rod 27 such that the control shaft 116 rotates about the rotational axis 118 . The rotational motion may be facilitated by a bearing 124 located between the control shaft 116 and the connecting rod 27 .

转向机构90可以可操作地联接到控制轴杆116并且可以被配置成围绕旋转轴118推动控制轴杆116。转向机构90可以包括伺服马达和编码器。因此,转向机构90可以直接致动控制轴杆116。在一些实施例中,转向机构90可以被配置成自由转动以在卧床10被推动而运动时允许控制轴杆116围绕旋转轴118回转。任选地,转向机构90可以被配置成锁定在位,并且抵抗控制轴杆116围绕旋转轴118的运动。The steering mechanism 90 can be operably coupled to the control shaft 116 and can be configured to push the control shaft 116 about the rotation axis 118. The steering mechanism 90 can include a servo motor and an encoder. Thus, the steering mechanism 90 can directly actuate the control shaft 116. In some embodiments, the steering mechanism 90 can be configured to rotate freely to allow the control shaft 116 to rotate about the rotation axis 118 when the couch 10 is moved by being pushed. Optionally, the steering mechanism 90 can be configured to lock in place and resist movement of the control shaft 116 about the rotation axis 118.

同时参照图7和图9至图10,转轮组合件110可以包括回转锁定模块130,用于将叉形物121锁定在基本上固定的朝向中。回转锁定模块130可以包括:螺钉部件132,用于与锁扣部件134接合;偏压部件136,其给螺钉部件132加偏压使其离开锁扣部件134;以及缆线138,用于在锁定致动器92与螺钉部件132之间传输机械能。锁定致动器92可以包括伺服马达和编码器。7 and 9-10 , the wheel assembly 110 may include a rotational locking module 130 for locking the fork 121 in a substantially fixed orientation. The rotational locking module 130 may include a screw member 132 for engaging a latch member 134, a biasing member 136 for biasing the screw member 132 away from the latch member 134, and a cable 138 for transmitting mechanical energy between the locking actuator 92 and the screw member 132. The locking actuator 92 may include a servo motor and an encoder.

可以用连杆27形成的通道收容螺钉部件132。螺钉部件132可以前进到通道中,使得螺钉部件132从锁扣部件134脱离并且从通道出来进入锁扣部件134内的干涉位置。偏压部件136可以将螺钉部件132朝向干涉位置偏压。缆线138可以联接到螺钉部件132并且与锁定致动器92可操作地接合,使得锁定致动器92可以传输足以克服偏压部件136的力,并且使螺钉部件132从干涉位置平移以使螺钉部件132从锁扣部件134脱离。The channel formed by the connecting rod 27 can accommodate the screw component 132. The screw component 132 can be advanced into the channel so that the screw component 132 disengages from the locking component 134 and exits the channel into an interference position within the locking component 134. The biasing component 136 can bias the screw component 132 toward the interference position. The cable 138 can be coupled to the screw component 132 and operably engaged with the locking actuator 92 so that the locking actuator 92 can transmit a force sufficient to overcome the biasing component 136 and translate the screw component 132 from the interference position to disengage the screw component 132 from the locking component 134.

在一些实施例中,锁扣部件134可以形成于叉形物121中,或者联接到叉形物121。锁扣部件134可以包括刚性主体,其形成与螺钉部件132互补的孔口。因此,螺钉部件132可以经由孔口在锁扣部件中行进和从锁扣部件出来。刚性主体可以被配置成干涉锁扣部件134的运动,该运动是由控制轴杆116围绕旋转轴118的运动引起的。具体地说,当在干涉位置中时,螺钉部件132可以受到锁扣部件134的刚性主体的限制,使得控制轴杆116围绕旋转轴118的运动很大程度上减轻。In some embodiments, the lock component 134 can be formed in the fork 121 or coupled to the fork 121. The lock component 134 can include a rigid body that forms an aperture that is complementary to the screw component 132. Thus, the screw component 132 can travel in and out of the lock component via the aperture. The rigid body can be configured to interfere with the movement of the lock component 134 caused by the movement of the control shaft 116 about the rotation axis 118. Specifically, when in the interference position, the screw component 132 can be constrained by the rigid body of the lock component 134, so that the movement of the control shaft 116 about the rotation axis 118 is largely mitigated.

同时参照图7和图9至图10,转轮组合件110可以包括制动模块140,用于抵抗转轮114围绕旋转轴123的旋转。制动模块140可以包括:制动活塞142,用于向制动衬块144传输制动力;偏压部件146,其向制动活塞142加偏压使其远离转轮114;以及制动机构94,其向制动活塞142提供制动力。在一些实施例中,制动机构94可以包括伺服马达和编码器。制动机构94可以可操作地联接到制动凸轮148,使得制动机构94的致动会使制动凸轮148围绕旋转轴151旋转。制动活塞142可以充当凸轮从动件。因此,制动凸轮148的旋转运动可以转换成制动活塞142的线性运动,制动活塞142的线性运动根据制动凸轮148的旋转方向而使制动活塞142朝向和远离转轮114移动。Referring to FIG7 and FIG9-10 simultaneously, the wheel assembly 110 may include a brake module 140 for resisting rotation of the wheel 114 about the rotation axis 123. The brake module 140 may include a brake piston 142 for transmitting a braking force to a brake pad 144; a biasing member 146 for biasing the brake piston 142 away from the wheel 114; and a brake mechanism 94 for providing the braking force to the brake piston 142. In some embodiments, the brake mechanism 94 may include a servo motor and an encoder. The brake mechanism 94 may be operably coupled to a brake cam 148 such that actuation of the brake mechanism 94 causes the brake cam 148 to rotate about the rotation axis 151. The brake piston 142 may act as a cam follower. Thus, the rotational motion of the brake cam 148 is converted into linear motion of the brake piston 142, which in turn moves the brake piston 142 toward and away from the wheel 114 depending on the direction of rotation of the brake cam 148.

制动衬块144可以联接到制动活塞142,使得制动活塞142朝向和远离转轮114的运动使制动衬块144与转轮114接合和脱离。在一些实施例中,制动衬块144可以是波状的以与制动衬块144在制动期间接触的转轮114的部分的形状匹配。任选地,制动衬块144的接触表面可以包括突出部和凹槽。Brake pad 144 can be coupled to brake piston 142 such that movement of brake piston 142 toward and away from wheel 114 engages and disengages brake pad 144 from wheel 114. In some embodiments, brake pad 144 can be contoured to match the shape of the portion of wheel 114 that brake pad 144 contacts during braking. Optionally, the contact surface of brake pad 144 can include protrusions and grooves.

再次参看图7,转向机构90、锁定致动器92和制动机构94中的每一个可以通信地联接到一个或多个处理器100。因此,任何操作人员控件57都可以经过编码以提供控制信号,该控制信号可操作以使得转向机构90、锁定致动器92、制动机构94或其组合的任何操作自动执行。或者或另外,任何卧床功能可以使转向机构90、锁定致动器92、制动机构94或其组合的任何操作自动执行。7 , each of the steering mechanism 90, the locking actuator 92, and the braking mechanism 94 can be communicatively coupled to one or more processors 100. Thus, any operator control 57 can be coded to provide a control signal operable to automate any operation of the steering mechanism 90, the locking actuator 92, the braking mechanism 94, or a combination thereof. Alternatively or additionally, any bed rest function can automate any operation of the steering mechanism 90, the locking actuator 92, the braking mechanism 94, or a combination thereof.

同时参照图3和图7至图10,任何操作人员控件57可以经过编码以提供控制信号,该控制信号可操作以使转向机构90将叉形物121致动成外侧位置(图10中描绘成短划线)。或者或另外,卧床功能(例如座椅功能)可以被配置成选择性地使转向机构90将叉形物121致动成外侧位置。当布置成外侧位置时,叉形物121和转轮114可以相对于卧床10的长度(从前端17到后端19的方向)竖直地朝向。因此,前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两个可以布置成外侧位置,使得前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两个朝向支撑框架12。3 and 7 to 10 simultaneously, any operator control 57 can be coded to provide a control signal operable to cause the steering mechanism 90 to actuate the fork 121 to an outboard position (depicted as a dashed line in FIG10 ). Alternatively or in addition, a bed function (e.g., a seat function) can be configured to selectively cause the steering mechanism 90 to actuate the fork 121 to an outboard position. When arranged in the outboard position, the fork 121 and the wheels 114 can be oriented vertically relative to the length of the bed 10 (direction from the front end 17 to the rear end 19). Thus, the front wheels 26, the rear wheels 46, or both can be arranged in the outboard position so that the front wheels 26, the rear wheels 46, or both are oriented toward the support frame 12.

同时参照图8和图11至图12,卧床功能可以包括手扶电梯功能,其被配置成在卧床10受到手扶电梯支撑的同时使受到患者支撑物14支撑的患者保持水平。因此,任何操作人员控件57可以经过编码以提供控制信号,该控制信号可操作以使电梯功能被激活、解除激活或这两者。在一些实施例中,手扶电梯功能可以被配置成将卧床10定向成使得患者在乘坐上行手扶电梯504或下行手扶电梯506相对于手扶电梯斜坡面朝相同的方向。具体地说,手扶电梯功能可以确保卧床10的后端19面向上行手扶电梯504和下行手扶电梯506的向下斜坡。换句话说,卧床10可以配置成使得卧床的后端19最后装载在上行手扶电梯504或下行手扶电梯506上。With reference to both FIG8 and FIG11-12, the bed function may include an escalator function configured to maintain a patient supported by the patient support 14 horizontally while the bed 10 is supported by the escalator. Accordingly, any operator control 57 may be coded to provide a control signal operable to activate, deactivate, or both the escalator function. In some embodiments, the escalator function may be configured to orient the bed 10 so that the patient faces the same direction relative to the escalator ramp when riding the ascending escalator 504 or the descending escalator 506. Specifically, the escalator function may ensure that the rear end 19 of the bed 10 faces the downward slope of the ascending escalator 504 and the descending escalator 506. In other words, the bed 10 may be configured so that the rear end 19 of the bed is ultimately loaded onto the ascending escalator 504 or the descending escalator 506.

现在参看图13,可以根据方法301实施电梯功能。应注意,虽然图13中描绘方法301包括多个所列举的过程,但是可以按任何次序执行方法301的任何过程或者忽略方法301的任何过程,但是并不脱离本发明的范围。在过程303处,卧床10的支撑框架12可以缩回。在一些实施例中,卧床10可以被配置成在继续电梯功能之前先自动检测支撑框架12是缩回的。或者或另外,卧床10可以被配置成自动缩回支撑框架12。Referring now to FIG. 13 , elevator functionality can be implemented according to method 301 . It should be noted that while method 301 is depicted in FIG. 13 as including a plurality of enumerated processes, any process of method 301 may be performed in any order or omitted without departing from the scope of the present invention. At process 303 , the support frame 12 of the bed 10 may be retracted. In some embodiments, the bed 10 may be configured to automatically detect that the support frame 12 is retracted before continuing the elevator functionality. Alternatively or additionally, the bed 10 may be configured to automatically retract the support frame 12.

同时参照图7、图8、图11和图13,卧床可以装载在上行手扶电梯504上。上行手扶电梯504可以相对于紧接在上行手扶电梯504前面的平台形成电梯斜坡θ。在过程305,前部转轮26可以装载在上行手扶电梯504上。在将前部转轮26装载在上行手扶电梯504上时,可以致动升高按钮56。在手扶电梯功能生效时,从升高按钮56发射的控制信号可以被一个或多个处理器100接收。响应于从升高按钮56发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以锁定前部转轮26以防止前部转轮滚动。当升高按钮56保持生效时,一个或多个处理器可以自动使视觉显示组件提供指示装载端支腿20生效的图像。Referring simultaneously to Figures 7, 8, 11, and 13, a bed can be loaded onto the ascending escalator 504. The ascending escalator 504 can form an elevator slope θ relative to the platform immediately in front of the ascending escalator 504. In process 305, the front wheels 26 can be loaded onto the ascending escalator 504. When the front wheels 26 are loaded onto the ascending escalator 504, the raise button 56 can be actuated. When the escalator function is activated, a control signal transmitted from the raise button 56 can be received by the one or more processors 100. In response to the control signal transmitted from the raise button 56, the one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. As a result, the front wheels 26 can be locked to prevent them from rolling. While the raise button 56 remains activated, the one or more processors can automatically cause the visual display assembly to provide an image indicating that the loading end legs 20 are activated.

在过程307,升高按钮56可以保持生效。响应于从升高按钮56发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动激活卧床调平功能。因此,卧床调平(均衡)功能可以动态地致动装载端支腿20以调节前部角度αf。因此,在卧床10被逐渐推动到上行手扶电梯504上时,前部角度αf可以改变以使支撑框架12保持基本上水平。At process 307, the raise button 56 may remain active. In response to the control signal transmitted from the raise button 56, one or more processors may execute machine-readable instructions to automatically activate the bed leveling function. Thus, the bed leveling (equalization) function may dynamically actuate the load-end legs 20 to adjust the front angle αf . Thus, as the bed 10 is gradually pushed onto the ascending escalator 504, the front angle αf may change to keep the support frame 12 substantially level.

在过程309,当在上行手扶电梯504上装载后部转轮46后,可以将升高按钮56解除激活。响应于从升高按钮56发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以锁定后部转轮46以防止后部转轮46滚动。在前部转轮26和后部转轮46装载在上行手扶电梯504上的情况下,卧床调平功能可以调节前部角度αf以与手扶电梯角度θ匹配。At process 309, after the rear wheels 46 are loaded onto the ascending escalator 504, the raise button 56 can be deactivated. In response to a control signal transmitted from the raise button 56, one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. Consequently, the rear wheels 46 can be locked to prevent them from rolling. With the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 loaded onto the ascending escalator 504, the bed-leveling function can adjust the front angle αf to match the escalator angle θ.

在过程311,在前部转轮26趋近上行手扶电梯504的末端时,可以激活升高按钮56。响应于从升高按钮56发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以解锁前部转轮26以允许前部转轮26滚动。当前部转轮26离开上行手扶电梯504时,卧床调平功能可以动态地调节前部角度αf以使卧床10的支撑框架12保持水平。At process 311, as the front wheels 26 approach the end of the ascending escalator 504, the raise button 56 can be activated. In response to a control signal transmitted from the raise button 56, one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. Consequently, the front wheels 26 can be unlocked to allow the front wheels 26 to roll. As the front wheels 26 exit the ascending escalator 504, the bed-leveling function can dynamically adjust the front angle αf to keep the support frame 12 of the bed 10 level.

在过程313,一个或多个处理器100可以自动确定装载端支腿20的位置。因此,当卧床10的前端17离开上行手扶电梯504时,前部角度αf可以达到预定角度,例如(但不限于)对应于装载端支腿20的完全延伸的角度。当达到预定水平时,一个或多个处理器100可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以解锁后部转轮46以允许后部转轮46滚动。因此,当卧床10的后端19到达上行手扶电梯504的末端时,卧床10可以滚动离开上行手扶电梯504。在一些实施例中,通过致动操作人员控件57中的一个可以将手扶电梯模式解除激活。或者或另外,在后部转轮46解锁之后,可以在预定时间段(例如大约15秒)中将电梯模式解除激活。At process 313, the one or more processors 100 can automatically determine the position of the loading-end legs 20. Consequently, when the front end 17 of the cot 10 exits the ascending escalator 504, the front angle αf can reach a predetermined angle, such as (but not limited to) the angle corresponding to full extension of the loading-end legs 20. When the predetermined level is reached, the one or more processors 100 can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the braking mechanism 94. Consequently, the rear wheels 46 can be unlocked to allow them to roll. Consequently, when the rear end 19 of the cot 10 reaches the end of the ascending escalator 504, the cot 10 can roll away from the ascending escalator 504. In some embodiments, escalator mode can be deactivated by actuating one of the operator controls 57. Alternatively or additionally, elevator mode can be deactivated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 15 seconds) after the rear wheels 46 are unlocked.

同时参照图7、图8、图12和图13,卧床10可以用与在上行手扶电梯504上装载相似的方式在下行手扶电梯506上装载。在过程305,可以将后部转轮46装载在下行手扶电梯506上。在将后部转轮46装载在下行手扶电梯506上之后,可以致动降低按钮60。在手扶电梯功能生效时,从降低按钮60发射的控制信号可以被一个或多个处理器100接收。响应于从降低按钮60发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以锁定后部转轮46以防止后部转轮46滚动。当降低按钮60保持生效时,一个或多个处理器可以自动使视觉显示组件提供指示装载端支腿20生效的图像。Referring simultaneously to Figures 7, 8, 12, and 13, the cot 10 can be loaded onto the descending escalator 506 in a manner similar to loading onto the ascending escalator 504. At process 305, the rear wheels 46 can be loaded onto the descending escalator 506. After the rear wheels 46 are loaded onto the descending escalator 506, the lowering button 60 can be actuated. When the escalator function is active, a control signal transmitted from the lowering button 60 can be received by the one or more processors 100. In response to the control signal transmitted from the lowering button 60, the one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the braking mechanism 94. Consequently, the rear wheels 46 can be locked to prevent them from rolling. While the lowering button 60 remains active, the one or more processors can automatically cause the visual display assembly to provide an image indicating that the loading-end legs 20 are active.

在过程307,降低按钮60可以保持生效。响应于从降低按钮60发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动激活卧床调平功能。因此,卧床调平功能可以动态地致动装载端支腿20以调节前部角度αf。因此,在卧床10被逐渐推动到下行手扶电梯506上时,前部角度αf可以改变以使支撑框架12保持基本上水平。At process 307, the lower button 60 may remain active. In response to the control signal transmitted from the lower button 60, one or more processors may execute machine-readable instructions to automatically activate the bed-leveling function. Consequently, the bed-leveling function may dynamically actuate the load-end legs 20 to adjust the front angle αf . Thus, as the bed 10 is gradually pushed onto the descending escalator 506, the front angle αf may change to keep the support frame 12 substantially level.

在过程309,在将前部转轮26装载在下行手扶电梯506上之后,可以将降低按钮60解除激活。响应于从降低按钮60发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器100可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以锁定前部转轮26以防止前部转轮26滚动。在前部转轮26和后部转轮46装载在下行手扶电梯506上的情况下,卧床调平功能可以调节前部角度αf以与手扶电梯角度θ匹配。At process 309, after the front wheels 26 are loaded onto the descending escalator 506, the lower button 60 can be deactivated. In response to a control signal transmitted from the lower button 60, the one or more processors 100 can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. Consequently, the front wheels 26 can be locked to prevent them from rolling. With the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 loaded onto the descending escalator 506, the bed-leveling function can adjust the front angle αf to match the escalator angle θ.

在过程311,当后部转轮46趋近下行手扶电梯506的末端时,可以激活降低按钮60。响应于从降低按钮60发射的控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以解锁后部转轮46以允许后部转轮46滚动。当后部转轮46离开下行手扶电梯506时,卧床调平功能可以动态地调节前部角度αf以使卧床10的支撑框架12保持基本上水平。At process 311, when the rear wheels 46 approach the end of the descending escalator 506, the lower button 60 can be activated. In response to the control signal transmitted from the lower button 60, one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. As a result, the rear wheels 46 can be unlocked to allow the rear wheels 46 to roll. When the rear wheels 46 leave the descending escalator 506, the bed-leveling function can dynamically adjust the front angle αf to keep the support frame 12 of the bed 10 substantially level.

在过程313,一个或多个处理器100可以自动确定装载端支腿20的位置。因此,当卧床10的后端19离开下行手扶电梯506时,前部角度αf可以达到预定角度,例如(但不限于)对应于装载端支腿20的完全延伸的角度。当达到预定水平时,一个或多个处理器100可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以解锁前部转轮26以允许前部转轮26滚动。因此,当卧床10的前端17到达下行手扶电梯506的末端时,卧床10可以滚动离开下行手扶电梯506。在一些实施例中,在解锁前部转轮26之后,可以在预定时间段(例如大约15秒)中将电梯模式解除激活。At process 313, the one or more processors 100 can automatically determine the position of the loading-end legs 20. Consequently, when the rear end 19 of the cot 10 exits the descending escalator 506, the front angle αf can reach a predetermined angle, such as (but not limited to) an angle corresponding to full extension of the loading-end legs 20. When the predetermined level is reached, the one or more processors 100 can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the braking mechanism 94. Consequently, the front wheels 26 can be unlocked to allow the front wheels 26 to roll. Consequently, when the front end 17 of the cot 10 reaches the end of the descending escalator 506, the cot 10 can roll away from the descending escalator 506. In some embodiments, after unlocking the front wheels 26, the elevator mode can be deactivated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., approximately 15 seconds).

同时参照图4B、图7和图8,卧床功能可以包括心肺复苏(CPR)功能,其可操作以在发生心跳骤停的情况下将卧床10自动调节成让医务人员执行有效CPR的人体工学位置。任何操作人员控件57可以经过编码以提供控制信号,其可操作以使CPR功能被激活、解除激活或这两者。在一些实施例中,当卧床在救护车内、连接到卧床紧固件或这两种情况时,可以自动将CPR功能解除激活。4B , 7 , and 8 , the bed rest function may include a cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) function operable to automatically adjust the bed rest 10 to an ergonomic position for medical personnel to perform effective CPR in the event of cardiac arrest. Any operator control 57 may be coded to provide a control signal operable to activate, deactivate, or both the CPR function. In some embodiments, the CPR function may be automatically deactivated when the bed rest is in an ambulance, connected to the bed rest fastener, or both.

在激活CPR功能之后,控制信号可以发射到一个或多个处理器100并且被一个或多个处理器100接收。响应于控制信号,一个或多个处理器可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动该制动机构94。因此,可以锁定前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两者以防止卧床10滚动。卧床10可以被配置成提供已激活CPR功能的音频指示。此外,卧床10的支撑框架12的高度可以缓慢调节成中间运输位置(图4B),这个中间运输位置对应于大约12英寸(大约30.5cm)与大约36英寸(大约91.4cm)之间的用于施予CPR的基本上水平的高度(诸如例如座椅高度、沙发高度),或任何其它适合于施予CPR的预定高度。在一些实施例中,操作人员控件57中的一个或多个可以被配置成锁定或解锁前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两者。致动操作人员控件57以锁定或解锁前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两者可以自动将CPR功能解除激活。因此,经由降低按钮60和升高按钮56对卧床10的正常操作可以恢复。In some embodiments, the control signal of the present invention can be transmitted to one or more processors 100 and received by one or more processors 100. In response to the control signal, one or more processors can execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the brake mechanism 94. Therefore, the front rotating wheel 26, the rear rotating wheel 46 or the two can be locked to prevent the bed 10 from rolling. The bed 10 can be configured to provide the audio indication of the activated CPR function. In addition, the height of the support frame 12 of the bed 10 can be slowly adjusted to the intermediate transport position (Fig. 4 B), and this intermediate transport position corresponds to the substantially horizontal height (such as, for example, seat height, sofa height) for giving CPR between about 12 inches (about 30.5cm) and about 36 inches (about 91.4cm), or any other predetermined height that is suitable for giving CPR. In certain embodiments, one or more of the operator controls 57 can be configured to lock or unlock the front rotating wheel 26, the rear rotating wheel 46 or the two. Actuating the operator control 57 to lock or unlock the front wheels 26, the rear wheels 46, or both can automatically deactivate the CPR function. Thus, normal operation of the bed 10 via the lowering button 60 and the raising button 56 can be restored.

同时参照图3、图7和图8,卧床功能可以包括体外膜氧合(ECMO)功能,其可操作以在卧床10的操作期间将卧床10的前端17自动维持在比后端19高的高度。在激活ECMO功能之后,控制信号可以发射到一个或多个处理器100并且被一个或多个处理器100接收。响应于控制信号,一个或多个处理器100可以执行机器可读指令以自动致动锁定致动器92。因此,可以防止前部转轮26、后部转轮46或这两者回转或转向。此外,前部角度αf、后部角度αb或这两者可以调节成使得支撑框架12从前端17到后端19处在预定的向下倾斜角。调节的实现方式可以基本上类似于卧床调平功能,区别是支撑框架12相对于重力调节成向下倾斜角,而不是相对于重力是水平的。此外,在ECMO功能被激活时,可以使用降低按钮60和升高按钮56以调节支撑框架12的平均高度,同时自动维持向下倾斜角。在将ECMO功能解除激活后,卧床10可以恢复正常操作。3 , 7 , and 8 , the bed rest function may include an extracorporeal membrane oxygenation (ECMO) function, which is operable to automatically maintain the front end 17 of the bed rest 10 at a higher height than the rear end 19 during operation of the bed rest 10. After the ECMO function is activated, a control signal may be transmitted to and received by the one or more processors 100. In response to the control signal, the one or more processors 100 may execute machine-readable instructions to automatically actuate the locking actuator 92. This prevents the front wheels 26 , the rear wheels 46 , or both from rotating or turning. Furthermore, the front angle α f , the rear angle α b , or both may be adjusted so that the support frame 12 is at a predetermined downward tilt angle from the front end 17 to the rear end 19. This adjustment may be implemented substantially similarly to the bed leveling function, except that the support frame 12 is adjusted to a downward tilt angle relative to gravity, rather than being horizontal relative to gravity. Furthermore, when the ECMO function is activated, the lower button 60 and the raise button 56 may be used to adjust the average height of the support frame 12 while automatically maintaining the downward tilt angle. After deactivating the ECMO function, the bed 10 can resume normal operation.

同时参照图14A和图14B,卧床10的实施例可以包括患者支撑部件400,用于在卧床10上支撑患者。在一些实施例中,患者支撑部件400可以联接到卧床10的支撑框架12。患者支撑部件400可以包括头部支撑部分402,用于支撑患者的背部以及头部和颈部,以及脚部支撑部分404,用于支撑患者的下肢区域。患者支撑部件400可进一步包括中间部分406,位于头部支撑部分402与脚部支撑部分404之间。任选地,患者支撑部件400可以包括支撑垫408,用于提供缓冲让患者感到舒适。支撑垫408可以包括外层,其由对于生物流体和材料不起反应的材料形成。14A and 14B , an embodiment of the reclining bed 10 may include a patient support 400 for supporting a patient on the reclining bed 10. In some embodiments, the patient support 400 may be coupled to the support frame 12 of the reclining bed 10. The patient support 400 may include a head support portion 402 for supporting the patient's back, head, and neck, and a foot support portion 404 for supporting the patient's lower extremity region. The patient support 400 may further include a middle portion 406 located between the head support portion 402 and the foot support portion 404. Optionally, the patient support 400 may include a support cushion 408 for providing cushioning for patient comfort. The support cushion 408 may include an outer layer formed of a material that is non-reactive to biological fluids and materials.

现在同时参照图14A和图14B,患者支撑部件400可以可操作以相对于卧床10的支撑框架12枢接。例如,头部支撑部分402、脚部支撑部分404或这两者可以相对于支撑框架12旋转。可以调节头部支撑部分402以相对于平坦位置(即,基本上与支撑框架12平行)升高患者的躯干。具体地说,可以在支撑框架12与头部支撑部分402之间限定头部偏移角θH。随着头部支撑部分402旋转离开支撑框架12,头部偏移角θH可以增加。在一些实施例中,头部偏移角θH可以限于基本上锐角的最大角度,诸如例如在一个实施例中大约是85°,或者在另一个实施例中大约是76°。可以调节脚部支撑部分404以相对于平坦位置(即,基本上与支撑框架12平行)升高患者的下肢区域。可以在支撑框架12与脚部支撑部分404之间限定脚部偏移角θF。随着脚部支撑部分404旋转离开支撑框架12,脚部偏移角θF可以增加。在一些实施例中,脚部偏移角θF可以限于基本上锐角的最大角度,诸如例如在一个实施例中大约是35°,在另一实施例中大约是25°,或者在另一实施例中大约是16°。Referring now to Figures 14A and 14B simultaneously, the patient support member 400 can be operable to pivot relative to the support frame 12 of the recliner 10. For example, the head support portion 402, the foot support portion 404, or both can be rotated relative to the support frame 12. The head support portion 402 can be adjusted to elevate the patient's torso relative to a flat position (i.e., substantially parallel to the support frame 12). Specifically, a head offset angle θH can be defined between the support frame 12 and the head support portion 402. As the head support portion 402 rotates away from the support frame 12, the head offset angle θH can increase. In some embodiments, the head offset angle θH can be limited to a substantially acute maximum angle, such as, for example, approximately 85° in one embodiment or approximately 76° in another embodiment. The foot support portion 404 can be adjusted to elevate the patient's lower extremity region relative to a flat position (i.e., substantially parallel to the support frame 12). A foot offset angle θF can be defined between the support frame 12 and the foot support portion 404. As the foot support portion 404 rotates away from the support frame 12, the foot offset angle θF can increase. In some embodiments, the foot offset angle θF can be limited to a substantially acute maximum angle, such as, for example, approximately 35° in one embodiment, approximately 25° in another embodiment, or approximately 16° in another embodiment.

同时参照图1和图14,卧床10可以被配置成自动致动成坐式装载位置(或者下文中也称为“座椅位置”)。具体地说,前部致动器16可以致动装载端支腿20,后部致动器18可以致动控制端支腿40,或者前部致动器16和后部致动器18都可以致动以相对于卧床10的前端17降低卧床10的后端19。当卧床10的后端19降低时,可以在支撑框架12与基本上水平的表面503之间形成坐式装载角度α。在一些实施例中,坐式装载角度α可以限于基本上锐角的最大角度,诸如例如在一个实施例中大约是35°,在另一实施例中大约是25°,或者在另一实施例中大约是16°。在一些实施例中,坐式装载角度α可以基本上与脚部偏移角θF相同,使得患者支撑部件400的脚部支撑部分404基本上平行于水平表面503。1 and 14 , the couch 10 can be configured to automatically actuate to a seated loading position (also referred to hereinafter as a "seating position"). Specifically, the front actuator 16 can actuate the loading-end legs 20, the rear actuator 18 can actuate the control-end legs 40, or both the front actuator 16 and the rear actuator 18 can actuate to lower the rear end 19 of the couch 10 relative to the front end 17 of the couch 10. When the rear end 19 of the couch 10 is lowered, a seated loading angle α can be formed between the support frame 12 and the substantially horizontal surface 503. In some embodiments, the seated loading angle α can be limited to a maximum angle that is substantially acute, such as, for example, approximately 35° in one embodiment, approximately 25° in another embodiment, or approximately 16° in another embodiment. In some embodiments, the seated loading angle α can be substantially the same as the foot offset angle θF , such that the foot support portion 404 of the patient support member 400 is substantially parallel to the horizontal surface 503.

再次参看图14A和图14B,在将卧床10自动致动成坐式装载位置之前,可以将患者支撑部件400的头部支撑部分402和脚部支撑部分404升高离开支撑框架12。此外,前部转轮26和后部转轮46可以朝向基本上相似的方向。一旦对准,前部转轮26和后部转轮46可以锁定在位。在一些实施例中,卧床10可以包括输入端,其被配置成接收将卧床致动成坐式装载位置的命令。例如,视觉显示组件或GUI 58可以包括触摸屏输入端,用于接收触感输入。或者或另外,各种其它按钮或音频输入端可以被配置成接收将卧床10致动成坐式装载位置的命令。Referring again to Figures 14A and 14B, before the reclining bed 10 is automatically actuated to the sitting loading position, the head support portion 402 and the foot support portion 404 of the patient support member 400 can be raised away from the support frame 12. In addition, the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 can be oriented in substantially similar directions. Once aligned, the front wheels 26 and the rear wheels 46 can be locked in place. In some embodiments, the reclining bed 10 can include an input terminal that is configured to receive a command to actuate the reclining bed to the sitting loading position. For example, the visual display assembly or GUI 58 can include a touch screen input terminal for receiving tactile input. Alternatively or in addition, various other buttons or audio input terminals can be configured to receive a command to actuate the reclining bed 10 to the sitting loading position.

一旦控制匣50接收到该命令,就可以将卧床10设置成坐式装载位置(座椅位置)模式。在一些实施例中,卧床10可以在进入坐式装载位置模式后无需额外输入而自动致动成坐式装载位置。替代地,卧床10在平移到坐式装载位置之前可能需要额外的输入。例如,在坐式装载位置模式中的时候,通过按压“-”按钮60(图2),可以降低卧床10的后端19。在另外的实施例中,可以向坐式装载位置模式施加时间限制以限制该模式保持生效的总时间。因此,当该时限到期时,坐式装载位置模式可以自动解除激活,在一个实施例中,时限诸如例如是大约60秒,在另一实施例中大约是30秒,或者在另外的实施例中大约是15秒。在更进一步的实施例中,当进入坐式装载位置模式时,可以提供指示卧床10处于坐式装载位置模式的确认,诸如例如听觉指示或者视觉显示组件或GUI 58上的视觉指示。Once the control box 50 receives this command, the sleeper 10 can be placed in the sitting stowage position (seat position) mode. In some embodiments, the sleeper 10 can automatically actuate to the sitting stowage position without additional input upon entering the sitting stowage position mode. Alternatively, the sleeper 10 may require additional input before translating to the sitting stowage position. For example, while in the sitting stowage position mode, the rear end 19 of the sleeper 10 can be lowered by pressing the "-" button 60 ( FIG. 2 ). In other embodiments, a time limit can be imposed on the sitting stowage position mode to limit the total time that the mode remains in effect. Thus, upon expiration of the time limit, the sitting stowage position mode can be automatically deactivated, such as, for example, approximately 60 seconds in one embodiment, approximately 30 seconds in another embodiment, or approximately 15 seconds in yet another embodiment. In further embodiments, upon entering the sitting stowage position mode, a confirmation indicating that the sleeper 10 is in the sitting stowage position mode can be provided, such as, for example, an audible indication or a visual indication on the visual display assembly or GUI 58.

现在参看图15,在另一个实施例中,卧床10(框图中总体上描绘)包括机载、联网的卧床控制系统,总体上通过参考符号1000表示。卧床控制系统1000使得能够将电子消息传送至卧床10上设置的各种电子控制电路或数字控制器,并从这些电子控制电路或数字控制器接收电子消息。应了解,数字控制器可以各自是微处理器或微控制器,诸如处理器100(图7),其包括中央处理单元、存储器和其它功能元件,全部设置在单一半导体衬底上,或者是提供下文所公开的专门操作的集成电路。另外,应了解,虽然控制器的特定的所公开的实施例使用经过编程的处理器和/或专用集成电路,但是这些装置可以使用分立的装置实施,或者使用任何模拟或混合的相应集成电路,其包括任何这些装置的逻辑或软件实施方案(例如仿真)。Referring now to FIG. 15 , in another embodiment, the bed 10 (generally depicted in a block diagram) includes an onboard, networked bed control system, generally designated by reference numeral 1000. The bed control system 1000 enables electronic messages to be transmitted to and received from various electronic control circuits or digital controllers provided on the bed 10. It should be understood that the digital controllers can each be a microprocessor or microcontroller, such as processor 100 ( FIG. 7 ), which includes a central processing unit, memory, and other functional elements, all disposed on a single semiconductor substrate, or an integrated circuit that provides the specialized operations disclosed below. Additionally, it should be understood that while certain disclosed embodiments of the controller utilize programmed processors and/or application-specific integrated circuits, these devices can be implemented using discrete devices, or using any analog or hybrid corresponding integrated circuit, including logic or software implementations (e.g., emulations) of any of these devices.

在一些实施例中,卧床控制系统1000设有一个或多个控制器,(例如)电机控制器1002、图形用户界面(GUI)控制器1004、和/或电池单元或控制器1006。所属领域的技术人员应理解,控制器的数目可以比图15中示出的控制器更少(例如图7描绘的一个或多个处理器100)或者更多。还应了解,图15中的控制器的编号是任意的,并且仅仅出于说明性目的描述各个控制器的专门功能。也就是说,在卧床10的一些实施例中,各个控制器的专门功能可以改变和/或与其它控制器组合和/或去掉。例如,在一个实施例中,卧床控制系统1000具有至少一个控制器、传感器、用户显示单元、电池单元1006和有线通信网络1008,该有线通信网络1008被配置成在至少一个控制器、传感器、用户显示单元和电池单元之间传送消息。在一个实施例中,电池单元1006是与电池组(即,电池)集成的电池管理系统,电池组向卧床10提供便携式电力,其中电池管理系统控制电池组的充电和放电,并且经由通信网络与至少一个控制器通信。In some embodiments, the bed control system 1000 includes one or more controllers, such as a motor controller 1002, a graphical user interface (GUI) controller 1004, and/or a battery unit or controller 1006. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the number of controllers may be fewer (e.g., one or more processors 100 depicted in FIG. 7 ) or greater than those shown in FIG. It should also be understood that the numbering of the controllers in FIG. 15 is arbitrary and is intended solely to illustrate the specific functionality of each controller for illustrative purposes. That is, in some embodiments of the bed 100, the specific functionality of each controller may be altered and/or combined with other controllers and/or eliminated. For example, in one embodiment, the bed control system 1000 includes at least one controller, a sensor, a user display unit, a battery unit 1006, and a wired communication network 1008 configured to transmit messages between the at least one controller, the sensor, the user display unit, and the battery unit. In one embodiment, the battery unit 1006 is a battery management system integrated with a battery pack (i.e., battery) that provides portable power to the bed 10, wherein the battery management system controls charging and discharging of the battery pack and communicates with at least one controller via a communication network.

在其它实施例中,各种控制器1002、1004、1006可以经由有线网络1008通信地连接,该有线网络1008诸如例如是控制器区域网络(CAN)、LONWorks网络、LIN网络、RS-232网络、Firewire网络、DeviceNet网络或提供用于这些电子控制电路之间的通信的通信系统的任何其它类型的网络或现场总线。不管有线网络1008的具体类型如何,物理网络节点(即,附接到卧床控制系统1000并且能够经由有线网络1008发送、接收或转发信息的有源电子装置或电路)与电子控制电路(控制器)之间可以存在有线链路,该电子控制电路(控制器)经过编程和/或设计以控制卧床的至少支腿致动器的移动,并且任选地控制卧床驱动和/或高度指示灯的照明、轮锁的锁定和解锁、外部卧床紧固件的解锁、数据记录和错误监视、校正和信号传送。In other embodiments, the various controllers 1002, 1004, 1006 can be communicatively connected via a wired network 1008, such as, for example, a controller area network (CAN), a LONWorks network, a LIN network, an RS-232 network, a Firewire network, a DeviceNet network, or any other type of network or fieldbus that provides a communication system for communication between these electronic control circuits. Regardless of the specific type of wired network 1008, a wired link can exist between the physical network nodes (i.e., active electronic devices or circuits attached to the bed control system 1000 and capable of sending, receiving, or forwarding information via the wired network 1008) and the electronic control circuits (controllers) that are programmed and/or designed to control movement of at least the leg actuators of the bed, and optionally control bed drive and/or lighting of height indicators, locking and unlocking of wheel locks, unlocking of external bed fasteners, data logging and error monitoring, calibration, and signal transmission.

每个物理网络节点通常包括电路板,该电路板包括控制用户界面、一个或多个致动器、一个或多个传感器和/或一个或多个其它电气组件所需要的电子器件,以及允许每个节点在卧床控制系统1000内通信所需要的相关电子器件。例如,在图15中,卧床控制系统1000中的第一节点可以是用于控制卧床10的一个或多个电机、致动器和/或每个活动脚轮锁(制动器)((例如)致动器16、18、转向机构90、锁定致动器92和/或制动机构94(图1和图7))的电机控制器1002。电机控制器1002包括允许控制器使用有线网络1008与任何其它联网电子器件通信所需要的相关电子器件。在一个实施例中,一个或多个处理器可以具体实施为电机控制器1002。Each physical network node typically includes a circuit board that includes the electronics needed to control a user interface, one or more actuators, one or more sensors, and/or one or more other electrical components, as well as the associated electronics needed to allow each node to communicate within the bed control system 1000. For example, in FIG15 , the first node in the bed control system 1000 may be a motor controller 1002 for controlling one or more motors, actuators, and/or each movable caster lock (brake) of the bed 10 (e.g., actuators 16, 18, steering mechanism 90, locking actuator 92, and/or braking mechanism 94 ( FIG1 and FIG7 )). The motor controller 1002 includes the associated electronics needed to allow the controller to communicate with any other networked electronics using a wired network 1008. In one embodiment, one or more processors may be embodied as the motor controller 1002.

GUI控制器1004可以是第二节点,其被配置成控制图形用户界面1005,并且在一个实施例中可以具体实施为控制匣50,该控制匣50设有视觉显示组件或GUI 58,即作为用户显示单元。图形用户界面1005可以包括一个或多个按钮或开关等等,诸如按钮阵列52和/或54(图8)中的任一个按钮,或者它可以包括触摸屏或其它这样的装置:该装置用于允许患者或照护者控制卧床10的一个或多个方面以及输出显示器,以提供卧床状态的视觉/图形反馈,还有来自所包括的音频和/或触感输出生成装置的相应音频和/或触感输出。GUI控制器1004包括允许GUI控制器1004使用有线网络1008与任何其它联网电子器件通信所需要的相关电子器件。The GUI controller 1004 can be a second node configured to control a graphical user interface 1005 and, in one embodiment, can be embodied as a control box 50 having a visual display assembly or GUI 58, i.e., as a user display unit. The graphical user interface 1005 can include one or more buttons or switches, such as any of the buttons in the button arrays 52 and/or 54 ( FIG. 8 ), or it can include a touch screen or other such device for allowing the patient or caregiver to control one or more aspects of the bed 10 and an output display to provide visual/graphical feedback of the bed's status, along with corresponding audio and/or tactile output from an included audio and/or tactile output generating device. The GUI controller 1004 includes the associated electronics necessary to allow the GUI controller 1004 to communicate with any other networked electronics using a wired network 1008.

卧床控制系统1000中的第三节点可以是用于控制卧床10的一个或多个基于电池的电力供应器的电池单元或控制器1006。电池控制器1006同样包括允许控制器1006使用有线网络1008与任何其它联网电子器件通信所需要的相关电子器件。在其它实施例中,卧床控制系统1000中的其它节点是(例如)可以连接到有线网络1008和/或被引导到任何控制器1002、1004和1006的一个或多个传感器。A third node in the bed control system 1000 may be a battery unit or controller 1006 for controlling one or more battery-based power supplies for the bed 10. The battery controller 1006 also includes the associated electronics necessary to allow the controller 1006 to communicate with any other networked electronics using the wired network 1008. In other embodiments, other nodes in the bed control system 1000 are, for example, one or more sensors that can be connected to the wired network 1008 and/or directed to any of the controllers 1002, 1004, and 1006.

在图示的实施例中,下文描述的传感器的对应输出端连接到电机控制器1002的输入端。所述一个或多个传感器可以包括一个或多个位置传感器1010,用于检测卧床10的组件的相对位置/方位,诸如装载端支腿和控制端支腿处在打开位置(即,卧床通过相关支腿升高到其最低位置上方),或者处在关闭位置(即,相关支腿处于其最低位置,从而将卧床置于其最低位置)。一个或多个传感器还可包括一个或多个温度感测传感器1012,用于检测电机的操作温度。所述一个或多个传感器可以包括一个或多个接近传感器1014和/或1016,用于检测卧床10的第一组件相对于外部支撑表面(诸如地面或急救运输工具的运输舱)和/或相对于卧床的另一组件的位置/方位,诸如用于检测中间装载轮离另一外表面的接近度和操作人员(控制端)支腿致动器支架离支撑架的相对方位。所述一个或多个传感器可以包括一个或多个角度传感器1018,用于检测卧床10的一个或多个组件的角定向,诸如装载端支腿和控制端支腿的角度。所述一个或多个传感器可以包括一个或多个检测传感器1020,用于检测与诸如设置于急救运输工具中的外部卧床紧固件的接近度和/或连接。所述一个或多个传感器可以包括一个或多个电压感测传感器1022,用于检测诸如充电电压的电压。应了解,在示出的实施例中,电机控制器1002负责处理这些传感器1010、1012、1014、1016、1018、1020和/或1022的输出,并且将包含感测到的信息的消息经由有线网络1008转发到卧床控制系统1000中的诸如控制器1004和1006的其它联网电子器件。In the illustrated embodiment, corresponding outputs of the sensors described below are connected to inputs of the motor controller 1002. The one or more sensors may include one or more position sensors 1010 for detecting the relative position/orientation of components of the cot 10, such as whether the loading-end legs and the control-end legs are in an open position (i.e., the cot is raised above its lowest position by the associated legs) or in a closed position (i.e., the associated legs are in their lowest position, thereby placing the cot in its lowest position). The one or more sensors may also include one or more temperature sensing sensors 1012 for detecting the operating temperature of the motor. The one or more sensors may include one or more proximity sensors 1014 and/or 1016 for detecting the position/orientation of a first component of the cot 10 relative to an external support surface (such as a ground or ambulance transport compartment) and/or relative to another component of the cot, such as for detecting the proximity of the intermediate loading wheel to another external surface and the relative orientation of the operator (control-end) leg actuator bracket to the support frame. The one or more sensors may include one or more angle sensors 1018 for detecting the angular orientation of one or more components of the bed 10, such as the angles of the loading end legs and the control end legs. The one or more sensors may include one or more detection sensors 1020 for detecting proximity and/or connection to external bed fasteners, such as those provided in an emergency transport. The one or more sensors may include one or more voltage sensing sensors 1022 for detecting a voltage, such as a charging voltage. It will be appreciated that in the illustrated embodiment, the motor controller 1002 is responsible for processing the output of these sensors 1010, 1012, 1014, 1016, 1018, 1020, and/or 1022 and forwarding messages containing the sensed information via the wired network 1008 to other networked electronics in the bed control system 1000, such as controllers 1004 and 1006.

在再一实施例中,卧床10的卧床控制系统1000还可以包括无线控制器1024,其经由有线网络1008联网到其它控制器1002、1004和1006,以按需要至少向外部无线接收器提供转发的消息以及任何其它经由有线网络1008传送的消息。例如,当医院开始使用音乐帮助缓解疼痛时,可以在GUI控制器1004中加载音乐播放器应用程序1009,其经由无线控制器1024与医院网络同步,并且播放经由医院网络传输/广播/流式传输的相同的音乐。在此实施例中,操作人员可以使用GUI 1005操作音乐播放器应用程序1009(以在需要时自动与医院音乐系统同步、停止、选择、改变等),并且使用卧床10上设置的音量控件通过音频扬声器1011播放音乐。如果需要的话,还可通过音乐播放器应用程序1009从存储器102(图7)中选择并播放预载的一系列音乐。应了解,无线控制器1024包括无线收发器1126和/或电子地联接到无线收发器1126,无线收发器1126提供到外部无线接收器1030的无线通信链路1028。无线通信链路1028可以是蓝牙连接、ZigBee连接、RuBee连接、WiFi(IEEE 802.11)连接、红外(IR)连接或任何其它合适的无线通信连接。In yet another embodiment, the bed control system 1000 of the bed 10 may further include a wireless controller 1024, which is networked to the other controllers 1002, 1004, and 1006 via a wired network 1008 to provide at least forwarded messages and any other messages transmitted via the wired network 1008 to an external wireless receiver as needed. For example, if a hospital begins using music to help relieve pain, a music player application 1009 may be loaded into the GUI controller 1004, synchronized with the hospital network via the wireless controller 1024, and play the same music transmitted/broadcast/streamed via the hospital network. In this embodiment, an operator can use the GUI 1005 to operate the music player application 1009 (to automatically synchronize with the hospital music system, stop, select, change, etc. when necessary) and play music through the audio speakers 1011 using the volume controls provided on the bed 10. If desired, the music player application 1009 can also select and play a preloaded selection of music from the memory 102 ( FIG. 7 ). It should be appreciated that the wireless controller 1024 includes and/or is electronically coupled to a wireless transceiver 1126 that provides a wireless communication link 1028 to an external wireless receiver 1030. The wireless communication link 1028 may be a Bluetooth connection, a ZigBee connection, a RuBee connection, a WiFi (IEEE 802.11) connection, an infrared (IR) connection, or any other suitable wireless communication connection.

卧床10具有多种操作模式,其中五种(5)是操作人员选择的电动运动操作模式:唤醒、直接供电-两种支腿、直接供电-装载端支腿模式、直接供电-控制端支腿模式和座椅位置模式。在一个实施例中,这五种(5)模式可以经由按钮53和/或经由按钮阵列52和/或54从GUI 1005选择,在另一实施例中,可以从控制匣50选择。GUI 1005可以提供关于卧床10的当前操作的视觉和/或听觉提示,诸如当卧床在升高或降低卧床10的电动模式中操作时,通过扬声器1011有声地说“升高”或“降低”。现在下文论述五种操作人员选择的电动运动操作模式。The couch 10 has multiple modes of operation, five (5) of which are operator-selected powered motion modes of operation: wake-up, direct power - both legs, direct power - load-end leg mode, direct power - control-end leg mode, and seat position mode. In one embodiment, these five (5) modes can be selected from the GUI 1005 via button 53 and/or via button arrays 52 and/or 54, and in another embodiment, can be selected from the control box 50. The GUI 1005 can provide visual and/or auditory cues regarding the current operation of the couch 10, such as audibly saying "raise" or "lower" through the speaker 1011 when the couch is operating in the powered mode of raising or lowering the couch 10. The five operator-selected powered motion modes of operation are now discussed below.

“唤醒”模式是卧床10的完全操作模式,该模式容许控制端支腿和装载端支腿的独立支腿移动。根据卧床10的状态,一种或两种支腿可以对“+/升高/延伸”和“-/降低/缩回”操作人员控制按钮1035、1037做出反应,操作人员控制按钮1035、1037分别可以(例如)经由用户界面1039提供。用户界面1039还可包括电力控件1041,(例如)按钮、拨动开关、选择器等等,以在操作人员命令接通或断开卧床10的卧床控制系统1000的电力时提供“开/通电”和(“关/断电”)。操控电力控件1041以将卧床控制系统1000打开到生效状态(即,唤醒模式)会向电机控制器1002发送供电电压(PWR)信号。还可以提供控制按钮1035、1037作为选择器或拨动开关的选择器位置或投掷位置,诸如可以通过图8中描绘的按钮56、60、按钮阵列52和/或54提供。此外,在其它实施例中,可以作为控制匣50(图1)的集成部分或者与控制匣50(图1)分开提供GUI控制器1004、GUI 1005和/或用户界面1039。The "wake-up" mode is a fully operational mode of the bed 10, allowing independent leg movement of the control-end legs and the load-end legs. Depending on the state of the bed 10, one or both legs may respond to "+/raise/extend" and "-/lower/retract" operator control buttons 1035 and 1037, respectively, which may be provided, for example, via a user interface 1039. The user interface 1039 may also include power controls 1041, such as buttons, toggle switches, selectors, and the like, to provide "power on/off" and "power off" to the bed control system 1000 of the bed 10 upon operator command. Manipulating the power controls 1041 to turn the bed control system 1000 into an active state (i.e., wake-up mode) sends a supply voltage (PWR) signal to the motor controller 1002. Control buttons 1035, 1037 may also be provided as selector positions or toggle positions of a selector or toggle switch, such as may be provided by buttons 56, 60, button arrays 52, and/or 54 depicted in Figure 8. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the GUI controller 1004, GUI 1005, and/or user interface 1039 may be provided as an integral part of or separate from the control cartridge 50 (Figure 1).

直接供电模式允许操作人员经由用户界面1039和/或GUI 1005直接地(并且独立地)控制卧床的支腿的运动。例如,通过选择直接供电模式之一,操作人员可以独立地控制一组或两组支腿以升高、降低、装载或卸载卧床。在下面的直接供电模式中,卧床10将不使用它的任何传感器来确定响应于操作人员控制按钮1035、1037之一(诸如升高按钮56或降低按钮60)的按钮按压应当移动哪条腿。“直接供电-两种支腿”模式允许操作人员通过下面的方式直接给控制和装载支腿电机供电:用直接供电模式按钮((例如)GUI 1005上的按钮阵列52中的按钮和/或按钮53)选择“直接供电模式-两种支腿”,然后按压升高/延伸操作人员控制(“+”)按钮1035或缩回/降低操作人员控制(“-”)按钮1037,不管其它传感器值如何。“直接供电-装载端支腿模式”允许操作人员通过按压“+”按钮1035或“-”按钮1037直接给装载端(装载)支腿电机供电,不管其它传感器值如何。“直接供电-控制端支腿模式”允许操作人员通过按压“+”按钮1035或“-”按钮1037直接给控制端(操作人员)支腿电机供电,不管其它传感器值如何。“座椅位置模式”允许操作人员容易将卧床10移动到一个位置,在这个位置中,使患者表面成角度,以允许患者更容易坐在卧床上,如上文前面的部分参看图13和图14更详细地解释的。可以用单个装载高度设置卧床10,这个装载高度与卧床可以装载到诸如地面上方的外部支撑表面((例如)运输工具的底板)上的高度匹配。当操作人员在使用“+”按钮1035升高卧床10时,卧床10将自动停止在这个高度。应了解,在每种直接供电模式中,在操作人员将卧床置于特定直接供电模式之后,倒计时器从预定量的时间(例如15秒)倒计时。如果在选择直接供电模式之后操作人员未执行进一步的动作(即,按压按钮1035或1037中的一个按钮),则倒计时器到期后电机控制器1002恢复成它的标准操作模式。在一些实施例中,可以在GUI 1005上提供示出倒计时器59(图8)和相应计数的图形图像。The direct power modes allow the operator to directly (and independently) control the movement of the couch's legs via the user interface 1039 and/or the GUI 1005. For example, by selecting one of the direct power modes, the operator can independently control one or both sets of legs to raise, lower, load, or unload the couch. In the following direct power modes, the couch 10 will not use any of its sensors to determine which leg should be moved in response to a button press of one of the operator control buttons 1035, 1037 (such as the raise button 56 or the lower button 60). The "direct power - both legs" mode allows the operator to directly power the control and loading leg motors by selecting "direct power mode - both legs" with a direct power mode button (e.g., a button in the button array 52 and/or button 53 on the GUI 1005) and then pressing the raise/extend operator control ("+") button 1035 or the retract/lower operator control ("-") button 1037, regardless of other sensor values. "Direct Power - Loading Leg Mode" allows the operator to directly power the loading (loading) leg motors by pressing the "+" button 1035 or the "-" button 1037, regardless of other sensor values. "Direct Power - Control Leg Mode" allows the operator to directly power the control (operator) leg motors by pressing the "+" button 1035 or the "-" button 1037, regardless of other sensor values. "Seating Position Mode" allows the operator to easily move the couch 10 to a position in which the patient surface is angled to allow the patient to more easily sit on the couch, as explained in more detail earlier in the text with reference to Figures 13 and 14. The couch 10 can be set up with a single loading height that matches the height at which it can be loaded onto an external support surface, such as above the ground (e.g., the floor of a vehicle). When the operator raises the couch 10 using the "+" button 1035, the couch 10 will automatically stop at this height. It should be understood that in each direct power mode, after the operator places the bed in a particular direct power mode, a countdown timer counts down from a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 15 seconds). If the operator does not perform further action (i.e., press one of buttons 1035 or 1037) after selecting the direct power mode, the motor controller 1002 reverts to its standard operating mode upon expiration of the countdown timer. In some embodiments, a graphical image showing the countdown timer 59 ( FIG. 8 ) and the corresponding count can be provided on the GUI 1005.

“休眠模式”是卧床10在休眠时的时间段中的降低功耗的状态。“手动操作”用于在无需电动控制的情况下缩回卧床支腿。手动操作独立于任何电机控制器操作或输入信号存在。电机控制器1002将不知道已执行手动操作,并且它的表现完全就像未执行手动操作一样。这个模式中的操作没有软件要求。当诸如通过按钮阵列52或54(图8)之一提供的卧床的电力控件1041处于关闭位置/状态(“关闭模式”)时,电机控制器1002断电(关),并且GUI1005的显示器、位置指示物和驱动灯1032、1034以及装载和控制端螺线管致动器1036、1038不通电。这个模式中的操作也没有软件要求。当卧床10连接到充电器1040以便给电池充电时使用“充电模式”,通过充电电压传感器1022予以检测。可以向GUI 1005或58提供图形图像以显示电池1007的相应电压/充电水平以及电池当前是否在充电的视觉指示,(例如)经由电池电压/充电水平图形图像61(图8)的颜色变化和/或脉动等。应了解,充电器在卧床10外部,并且可以连接到急救运输工具内的出口,或者直接连接到车辆的电力系统。在其它实施例中,当卧床10对接到可以通过卧床紧固件检测传感器1020检测到的卧床紧固件(未图示)中时,无线远程车载控件(未图示)可以变成生效,用于控制卧床的支腿的延伸和缩回,这个控制是经由通过无线控制器1024接收到并且发送至电机控制器1002以用于经由有线网络1008执行(如果期望的话)的命令消息。"Sleep Mode" is a state of reduced power consumption during periods of sleep when the bed 10 is asleep. "Manual Operation" is used to retract the bed legs without the need for electrical control. Manual Operation exists independently of any motor controller operation or input signal. The motor controller 1002 will be unaware that a manual operation has been performed and will behave exactly as if no manual operation has been performed. Operation in this mode requires no software. When the bed's power controls 1041, such as those provided by one of the button arrays 52 or 54 ( FIG. 8 ), are in the off position/state ("Off Mode"), the motor controller 1002 is powered off (off), and the display, position indicator, and drive lights 1032 , 1034 of the GUI 1005, as well as the load and control end solenoid actuators 1036 , 1038, are not powered. Operation in this mode also requires no software. "Charge Mode" is used when the bed 10 is connected to the charger 1040 to charge the battery, which is detected by the charge voltage sensor 1022. A graphical image can be provided to the GUI 1005 or 58 to display the corresponding voltage/charge level of the battery 1007 and a visual indication of whether the battery is currently charging, such as via a color change and/or pulsation of the battery voltage/charge level graphical image 61 ( FIG. 8 ). It should be understood that the charger is external to the bed 10 and can be connected to an outlet within the emergency transport or directly to the vehicle's power system. In other embodiments, when the bed 10 is docked into a bed fastener (not shown) that can be detected by the bed fastener detection sensor 1020, a wireless remote vehicle control (not shown) can become active for controlling the extension and retraction of the legs of the bed via command messages received by the wireless controller 1024 and sent to the motor controller 1002 for execution (if desired) via the wired network 1008.

参看图16,图中示出了用于电机控制器1002的通信消息接发协议,其中示出了从电机控制器1002经由有线网络1008提供的信息。根据该协议的每条消息由标头帧、字节数帧和数据帧构成,标头帧指示经由卧床控制系统1000提供的消息的发源地和类型字节数帧指示用于消息错误检测的消息的长度。来自电机控制器1002的消息中的数据帧可以包括B1位、B2位、C1底板条件位、C2底板条件位、D1位、D2位、唤醒位、关灯位、记录位、充电电压存在位、开灯位、紧固件检测位、USB活动位、A1延伸位、A2延伸位、电机状态位、电压区间位、和/或电机控制器错误代码位。16 , a communication messaging protocol for motor controller 1002 is shown, illustrating information provided from motor controller 1002 via wired network 1008. Each message according to this protocol consists of a header frame, which indicates the origin and type of the message provided via bed control system 1000, a byte frame, and a data frame. The header frame indicates the origin and type of the message provided via bed control system 1000, and the byte frame indicates the length of the message for message error detection. The data frame in a message from motor controller 1002 may include a B1 bit, a B2 bit, a C1 floor condition bit, a C2 floor condition bit, a D1 bit, a D2 bit, a wake-up bit, a light-off bit, a record bit, a charging voltage present bit, a light-on bit, a fastener detected bit, a USB activity bit, an A1 extension bit, an A2 extension bit, a motor status bit, a voltage range bit, and/or a motor controller error code bit.

在“+”按钮1035被按压时,通过电机控制器1002设置B1位,并且经由有线网络1008广播B1位。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,通过电机控制器1002设置B2位,并且经由有线网络1008广播B2位。在设置输入代码信号的C1底板条件位时,通过电机控制器1002设置C1底板条件位,并且经由有线网络1008广播C1底板条件位。在设置输入代码信号的C2底板条件位时,通过电机控制器1002设置C2底板条件位,并且经由有线网络1008广播C2底板条件位。在设置D1时(当关闭时),通过电机控制器1002设置D1位,并且经由有线网络1008广播D1位。在设置D2时(当关闭时),通过电机控制器1002设置D2位,并且经由有线网络1008广播D2位。当操作模式是唤醒或充电时,或者如果“按钮卡住错误”生效时(即使当电机控制器1002处于休眠模式时),也通过电机控制器1002设置唤醒位并且经由有线网络1008广播唤醒位。在电池电压小于灯最低电压阈值时,通过电机控制器1002设置关灯位,并且经由有线网络1008广播关灯位。在一个实施例中,灯最低电压阈值是5伏,但是可以经由改变配置文件1106或脚本1100(图19)中的这个值集而设置成任何其它期望电压水平。当电机控制器被配置成记录到可移除闪存卡((例如)诸如存储棒、SD卡、压缩闪存等等)时,通过电机控制器1002设置记录位,并且经由有线网络1008广播记录位。When the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the B1 bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the B1 bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the B2 bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the B2 bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When the C1 backplane condition bit of the input code signal is set, the C1 backplane condition bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the C1 backplane condition bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When the C2 backplane condition bit of the input code signal is set, the C2 backplane condition bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the C2 backplane condition bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When D1 is set (when closed), the D1 bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the D1 bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When D2 is set (when closed), the D2 bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and the D2 bit is broadcast via the wired network 1008. When the operating mode is wakeup or charging, or if a "stuck button error" is active (even when motor controller 1002 is in sleep mode), the wakeup bit is set by motor controller 1002 and broadcast via wired network 1008. When the battery voltage is less than the minimum lamp voltage threshold, the lights-off bit is set by motor controller 1002 and broadcast via wired network 1008. In one embodiment, the minimum lamp voltage threshold is 5 volts, but can be set to any other desired voltage level by changing this value set in configuration file 1106 or script 1100 (Figure 19). When the motor controller is configured to log to a removable flash memory card (e.g., such as a memory stick, SD card, compact flash, etc.), the logging bit is set by motor controller 1002 and broadcast via wired network 1008.

当电机控制器经由充电电压传感器1022检测到非零电压(Charge+)时,通过电机控制器1002设置充电电压存在位,并且经由有线网络1008广播充电电压存在位。在经由按钮阵列52和/或54的按钮和/或经由无线控制器1024接收到的命令灯打开的遥控信号而命令灯打开时,通过电机控制器1002设置开灯位,并且经由有线网络1008广播开灯位。当软件实用工具连接到控制器(例如用于编程、诊断、更新等)时,通过电机控制器1002设置USB活动位,并且经由有线网络1008广播USB活动位。通过电机控制器1002设置A1延伸(32位)并且经由有线网络1008广播A1延伸以指示装载(装载端)支腿致动器杆的延伸量。A1延伸以密耳为单位表达,范围是从0到18000,其中0密耳是完全缩回,18000密耳是完全延伸。通过电机控制器1002设置A2延伸(32位)并且经由有线网络1008广播A2延伸以指示操作人员(控制端)支腿致动器杆的延伸量。A2延伸以密耳为单位表达,范围是从0到18000,其中0密耳是完全缩回,18000密耳是完全延伸。When the motor controller detects a non-zero voltage (Charge+) via the charge voltage sensor 1022, the charge voltage present bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcast via the wired network 1008. When the light is commanded to turn on via a button on the button array 52 and/or 54 and/or a remote control signal received via the wireless controller 1024, the light on bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcast via the wired network 1008. When a software utility is connected to the controller (e.g., for programming, diagnostics, updates, etc.), the USB activity bit is set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcast via the wired network 1008. The A1 extension (32-bit) is set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcast via the wired network 1008 to indicate the amount of extension of the load (load-end) outrigger actuator rod. The A1 extension is expressed in mils, ranging from 0 to 18,000, with 0 mils being fully retracted and 18,000 mils being fully extended. A2 Extension (32 bits) is set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcast over the wired network 1008 to indicate to the operator (control end) the extension of the outrigger actuator rod. A2 Extension is expressed in mils and ranges from 0 to 18,000, where 0 mils is fully retracted and 18,000 mils is fully extended.

通过电机控制器1002设置电机状态位(在一个实施例中是32位,在其它实施例中是其它期望的位长度),并且经由有线网络1008广播电机状态位以用下面的计数指示当前电机状态:0=电机状态0;1=电机状态1;2=电机状态2;3=电机状态3;4=电机状态1-;5=电机状态2-;6=电机状态3-;7=电机状态4;8=电机状态5;9=电机状态6;10=电机状态7;11=电机状态8;以及12=电机状态9。下文后面的部分中更详细地论述这些电机状态中的每种电机状态。对于支腿移动被锁定的任何状况,电机控制器1002将向GUI控制器1004报告电机状态0以用于显示器1005的指示。通过电机控制器1002设置电压区间位(在一个实施例中是32位,在其它实施例中是其它期望的位长度)并且经由有线网络1008广播电压区间位以指示当前电压区间。当检测到电机控制器错误代码位时,通过电机控制器1002设置电机控制器错误代码位(在一个实施例中是64位,在其它实施例中是其它期望的位长度),并且经由有线网络1008广播电机控制器错误代码位。后面的部分中更详细地论述引起提供特定电机控制器错误代码的条件。The motor state bits (32 bits in one embodiment, other desired bit lengths in other embodiments) are set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcasted over the wired network 1008 to indicate the current motor state using the following count: 0 = motor state 0; 1 = motor state 1; 2 = motor state 2; 3 = motor state 3; 4 = motor state 1-; 5 = motor state 2-; 6 = motor state 3-; 7 = motor state 4; 8 = motor state 5; 9 = motor state 6; 10 = motor state 7; 11 = motor state 8; and 12 = motor state 9. Each of these motor states is discussed in more detail in the following sections. For any condition where leg movement is locked, the motor controller 1002 will report motor state 0 to the GUI controller 1004 for indication on the display 1005. The voltage range bits (32 bits in one embodiment, other desired bit lengths in other embodiments) are set by the motor controller 1002 and broadcasted over the wired network 1008 to indicate the current voltage range. When a motor controller error code bit is detected, the motor controller error code bit is set by the motor controller 1002 (64 bits in one embodiment, other desired bit lengths in other embodiments) and broadcast via the wired network 1008. The conditions that cause a particular motor controller error code to be provided are discussed in more detail in a later section.

参看图17,图中示出了用于电池控制器1006的通信消息接发协议,其中示出了从电池控制器1006经由有线网络1008提供的信息。根据该协议的每条消息由标头帧、字节数帧和数据帧构成,标头帧指示经由卧床控制系统1000提供的消息的发源地和类型,字节数帧指示用于消息错误检测的消息的长度。来自电池控制器1006的消息中的数据帧可以包括充电位、充满电位、电池错误代码位、高温位、电池温度字节、电池电压字节和/或欠压位。在经由充电器1040给电池1007充电的同时,通过电池控制器1006在消息中设置充电位并且周期性地经由有线网络1008广播充电位。当与充电电压传感器1022的值比较时,电机控制器1002使用这个信息来检测充电错误,充电电压传感器1022的值应当同样指示电池1007低于指示充电需要的电流的电压水平。当电池1007处在充满电电压时,电池控制器1006在消息中设置充满电位并且经由有线网络1008广播充满电位。当与充电电压传感器1022的值比较时,电机控制器1002使用这个信息来检测充电错误,充电电压传感器1022的值应当同样指示电池不再低于指示充电需要的电流的电压水平。Referring to FIG. 17 , the communication messaging protocol for the battery controller 1006 is shown, illustrating information provided from the battery controller 1006 via the wired network 1008. Each message according to this protocol consists of a header frame, indicating the origin and type of the message provided via the bed control system 1000, a byte frame, and a data frame. The header frame indicates the origin and type of the message provided via the bed control system 1000, and the byte frame indicates the length of the message for error detection. The data frame in messages from the battery controller 1006 may include a charge bit, a full charge level, a battery error code bit, a high temperature bit, a battery temperature byte, a battery voltage byte, and/or an undervoltage bit. While the battery 1007 is being charged via the charger 1040, the charge bit is set in messages by the battery controller 1006 and periodically broadcast via the wired network 1008. The motor controller 1002 uses this information to detect charging errors when compared with the value of the charge voltage sensor 1022, which should also indicate that the battery 1007 voltage is below a level indicating the required charging current. When the battery 1007 is at the fully charged voltage, the battery controller 1006 sets the full charge level in the message and broadcasts the full charge level via the wired network 1008. The motor controller 1002 uses this information to detect charging errors when compared to the value of the charge voltage sensor 1022, which should also indicate that the battery is no longer below a voltage level indicating the current required for charging.

响应于在给卧床10的操作供电时检测到电池1007提供的电流和/或电压的错误,电池控制器1006在消息中设置电池错误代码位(在一个实施例中是16位,在其它实施例中是其它期望的位长度),并且经由有线网络1008广播电池错误代码位。电机控制器1002使用电池错误代码来设置用于显示器1005的电机控制器错误代码,后面的部分将予以论述。当电池1007处在高于55℃的温度时,电池控制器1006在消息中设置高温位并且经由有线网络1008广播高温位。电机控制器1002同样使用这个信息来设置用于显示器1005的电机控制器错误代码。在读取电池的温度和电压之后,电池控制器1006在消息中设置电池温度字节和电池电压字节,并且周期性地经由有线网络1008广播温度字节和电池电压字节。如果来自电池控制器1006的消息中的最低有效位在某一时间之后未改变,则电机控制器1002将从充电电压传感器1022的输入端读取电池电压(ChargeV)。在一个实施例中,当总电池电压1007低于33.5V时,电池控制器1006在消息中设置欠电压位并且经由有线网络1008广播欠电压位,在其它实施例中按照需要并且按照配置文件1106中的设置,总电池电压可以更高或更低。在这个电压处并且在保持在这个电压以下时,电机控制器1002将从充电电压传感器1022的输入端读取电池电压(ChargeV),而不是从来自电池控制器1006的消息读取。In response to detecting an error in the current and/or voltage provided by the battery 1007 while powering the operation of the bed 10, the battery controller 1006 sets a battery error code bit (16 bits in one embodiment, other desired bit lengths in other embodiments) in a message and broadcasts the battery error code bit via the wired network 1008. The motor controller 1002 uses the battery error code to set a motor controller error code for the display 1005, as discussed later. When the battery 1007 is at a temperature greater than 55°C, the battery controller 1006 sets a high temperature bit in a message and broadcasts the high temperature bit via the wired network 1008. The motor controller 1002 also uses this information to set a motor controller error code for the display 1005. After reading the battery temperature and voltage, the battery controller 1006 sets a battery temperature byte and a battery voltage byte in a message and periodically broadcasts the temperature byte and battery voltage byte via the wired network 1008. If the least significant bit in the message from the battery controller 1006 does not change after a certain time, the motor controller 1002 will read the battery voltage (ChargeV) from the input of the charge voltage sensor 1022. In one embodiment, when the total battery voltage 1007 is below 33.5V, the battery controller 1006 sets the undervoltage bit in the message and broadcasts the undervoltage bit via the wired network 1008. In other embodiments, the total battery voltage can be higher or lower as needed and as set in the configuration file 1106. At this voltage and while it remains below this voltage, the motor controller 1002 will read the battery voltage (ChargeV) from the input of the charge voltage sensor 1022 instead of reading it from the message from the battery controller 1006.

参看图18,图中示出了用于GUI控制器1004的通信消息接发协议,其中示出了从GUI控制器1004经由有线网络1008提供的信息。根据该协议的每条消息由标头帧、字节数帧和数据帧构成,标头帧指示经由卧床控制系统1000提供的消息的发源地和类型,字节数帧指示用于消息错误检测的消息的长度。来自GUI控制器1004的消息中的数据帧包括驱动灯位、直接供电模式代码位、显示器软件版本位、显示器配置版本位和显示器图形版本位。18 , a communication messaging protocol for GUI controller 1004 is shown, illustrating information provided from GUI controller 1004 via wired network 1008. Each message according to this protocol consists of a header frame, which indicates the origin and type of the message provided via bed control system 1000; a byte frame, which indicates the length of the message for error detection; and a data frame. The data frame in messages from GUI controller 1004 includes a lamp driver bit, a direct power mode code bit, a display software version bit, a display configuration version bit, and a display graphics version bit.

当操作人员经由GUI 1005命令激活卧床10的驱动灯1034(诸如灯86、88和89)时,GUI控制器1004在消息中设置驱动灯位,并且经由有线网络1008广播驱动灯位。电机控制器1002响应于从GUI控制器读取设置了驱动灯位的消息而接通驱动灯1034,诸如灯86、88和89。如下文的部分中所解释,电机控制器1002在选择操作模式时读取并使用直接供电模式代码位(在一个实施例中是3位,在其它实施例中是其它期望的位长度),该直接供电模式代码位由GUI控制器1004响应于操作人员经由GUI 1005的输入而在消息中设置,并且经由有线网络1008广播。GUI控制器1004提供的其余数据(诸如显示器软件版本位、显示器配置版本位和显示器图形版本位)由GUI控制器1004响应于查询在消息中设置,并且由电机控制器1002用来设置这些版本值并且向经由USB连接到电机控制器的发出查询的外部实用工具提供这些版本值,以用于诊断/更新目的。When the operator commands activation of the driving lights 1034 (such as lights 86, 88, and 89) of the bed 10 via the GUI 1005, the GUI controller 1004 sets the driving light bit in a message and broadcasts the driving light bit via the wired network 1008. The motor controller 1002 turns on the driving lights 1034, such as lights 86, 88, and 89, in response to reading the message from the GUI controller that the driving light bit is set. As explained in the following sections, the motor controller 1002 reads and uses the direct power mode code bits (3 bits in one embodiment, other desired bit lengths in other embodiments) when selecting an operating mode. The direct power mode code bits are set in a message by the GUI controller 1004 in response to the operator's input via the GUI 1005 and broadcast via the wired network 1008. The remaining data provided by the GUI controller 1004 (such as the display software version bits, the display configuration version bits, and the display graphics version bits) are set by the GUI controller 1004 in the message in response to the query and are used by the motor controller 1002 to set these version values and provide these version values to an external utility issuing the query connected to the motor controller via USB for diagnostic/update purposes.

表1:电机控制器I/O和图15中示出电机控制器1002与系统1000的其余部分之间的I/O信号。Table 1: Motor Controller I/O and I/O signals between motor controller 1002 and the rest of system 1000 are shown in FIG. 15 .

表1:电机控制器I/OTable 1: Motor Controller I/O

电机控制器1002基于接收到的输入信号选择模式,见表1和图19。在这个所图示的实施例中,电机控制器1002遵循经由一个或多个脚本1100提供的程序指令。每个脚本提供程序代码或字节码,这些代码保存到电机控制器1002的存储器(诸如存储器102(图7))中并且从该存储器运行。每个字节代码例如并且不限于可以是逻辑表达式、语句或输入到电机控制器1002用于执行的值。例如,在一个实施例中,经由使用控制器1002的一个或多个计时器寄存器的脚本来实施唤醒计时器1104(图19)。计时器寄存器是可以使用来自脚本1100的脚本命令加载有值的计数器。接着计数器与任何其它脚本的执行状态无关地每毫秒倒计时。脚本的程序代码中包含如下功能:加载计时器、读取其当前计数值、暂停和恢复计数,并且检验计数是否已达到零(0)。The motor controller 1002 selects a mode based on the input signals received, see Table 1 and Figure 19. In this illustrated embodiment, the motor controller 1002 follows program instructions provided via one or more scripts 1100. Each script provides program code or bytecode that is saved to and executed from a memory of the motor controller 1002 (such as memory 102 (Figure 7)). Each bytecode can be, for example and without limitation, a logical expression, a statement, or a value input to the motor controller 1002 for execution. For example, in one embodiment, a wake-up timer 1104 (Figure 19) is implemented via a script that uses one or more timer registers of the controller 1002. The timer register is a counter that can be loaded with a value using a script command from the script 1100. The counter then counts down every millisecond regardless of the execution state of any other script. The program code of the script includes the following functions: loading the timer, reading its current count value, pausing and resuming the count, and checking whether the count has reached zero (0).

在控制器的存储器1102中提供了许多其它脚本1100,这些脚本使得卧床10能够提供所有上述移动、操作和指示,下文的部分中更详细地论述这些脚本。电机控制器1002还使用同样存储于存储器(例如存储器102)中的配置文件1106以从中读取并且用于比较和/或设置本文中论述的特定预设/预定参数/变量。应了解,本文中论述的任何预设参数可以在配置文件1106或脚本1100中提供并且由电机控制器1002从中读取,并且如果此预设参数在配置文件1106中提供,则可以由操作人员自定义。一旦特定脚本存储于控制器的存储器(诸如存储器102)中,每当控制器1002启动时,就可以手动地或自动地执行该脚本。通过经由USB端口发送命令而执行手动启动。在(例如)经由来自用户界面1039的PWR信号给控制器上电之后,或者在通过设置自动脚本配置以在控制器的配置存储器中启用(例如)引导程序之后,可以自动启动脚本。当启用时,如果在复位之后在存储器中检测到脚本,则启用脚本执行并且将运行脚本。Many other scripts 1100 are provided in the controller's memory 1102, which enable the bed 10 to provide all of the aforementioned movements, operations, and instructions. These scripts are discussed in more detail in the following sections. The motor controller 1002 also uses a configuration file 1106, also stored in memory (e.g., memory 102), to read from and compare and/or set specific preset/predetermined parameters/variables discussed herein. It should be understood that any preset parameter discussed herein can be provided in a configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read from by the motor controller 1002, and if provided in the configuration file 1106, can be customized by the operator. Once a particular script is stored in the controller's memory (e.g., memory 102), it can be executed manually or automatically whenever the controller 1002 is powered on. Manual activation is performed by sending a command via the USB port. Scripts can be automatically activated after the controller is powered on, for example, via a PWR signal from the user interface 1039, or after enabling, for example, a bootloader in the controller's configuration memory by setting an automatic script configuration. When enabled, if a script is detected in memory after a reset, script execution is enabled and the script will be run.

图20经由流程图示出了电机控制器1002执行的主脚本(即,程序指令)2000,用于基于上述输入而自动确定电机模式选择,并且实时(即,不到1秒内)发出电机命令。在处理步骤2002中,电机控制器1002检查来自用户界面1039的PWR信号是否为低态,如果是的话,则电机控制器1002维持的模式是“关闭”模式2004。如果在处理步骤2002中来自用户界面1039的PWR信号是高态,则在处理步骤2006中电机控制器1002检验来自充电器的充电电压(ChargeV)是否非零,并且如果是的话,则电机控制器1002选择的模式是“充电”模式2008。如果在处理步骤2006中ChargeV电压是零,则在处理步骤2010中,电机控制器1002检验前一模式是否为“充电”模式2008。如果是,则电机控制器1002在步骤2012中检验电机控制器1002运行的唤醒计时器1104是否已到期,如果是的话,则电机控制器1002将卧床10置于“休眠”模式2014。如果电机控制器1002在处理步骤2012中确定唤醒计时器1104的唤醒时间尚未到期,则电机控制器1002将卧床置于“唤醒”模式2016。应了解,唤醒时间可以经由配置文件1106配置,但是在一个实施例中,唤醒时间可为(例如)选自0到10000秒的范围,并且在一个具体实施例中是600秒。然而,如果在处理步骤2010中,前一模式不是充电模式2008,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2018中检验前一模式是否为“关闭”模式2004,如果是的话,则电机控制器1002将卧床置于“休眠”模式2014。换句话说,在预设的未使用时间量之后,电机控制器1002将进入“休眠”模式2014以节约电力。FIG20 illustrates, via a flowchart, a main script (i.e., program instructions) 2000 executed by the motor controller 1002 to automatically determine the motor mode selection based on the above-described inputs and issue motor commands in real time (i.e., in less than 1 second). In process step 2002, the motor controller 1002 checks whether the PWR signal from the user interface 1039 is low. If so, the mode maintained by the motor controller 1002 is "off" mode 2004. If the PWR signal from the user interface 1039 is high in process step 2002, the motor controller 1002 checks whether the charge voltage (ChargeV) from the charger is non-zero in process step 2006. If so, the mode selected by the motor controller 1002 is "charge" mode 2008. If the ChargeV voltage is zero in process step 2006, the motor controller 1002 checks whether the previous mode was "charge" mode 2008 in process step 2010. If so, the motor controller 1002 checks in step 2012 whether the wake-up timer 1104 running on the motor controller 1002 has expired. If so, the motor controller 1002 places the bed 10 in "sleep" mode 2014. If the motor controller 1002 determines in process step 2012 that the wake-up time of the wake-up timer 1104 has not expired, the motor controller 1002 places the bed in "wake-up" mode 2016. It should be understood that the wake-up time can be configured via the configuration file 1106, but in one embodiment, the wake-up time can be, for example, selected from a range of 0 to 10,000 seconds, and in one specific embodiment, is 600 seconds. However, if in process step 2010 the previous mode was not charging mode 2008, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2018 whether the previous mode was "off" mode 2004. If so, the motor controller 1002 places the bed in "sleep" mode 2014. In other words, after a preset amount of time of non-use, the motor controller 1002 will enter a "sleep" mode 2014 to conserve power.

在处理步骤2018中,确定结果是前一模式不是“关闭”模式2004,接着在处理步骤2020中,电机控制器1002检验自从最后一次按压“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037以来是否已超过唤醒时间指定的时间,如果是的话则电机控制器1002将卧床置于“休眠”模式2014。当在步骤2022中卧床处于休眠模式2014时如果按压“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037,则将接着使电机控制器1002将卧床置于唤醒模式2016。如果在处理步骤2020中自从最后一次按压“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037以来还不到唤醒时间指定的时间,则电机控制器1002在步骤2024中检验直接供电模式代码是否为0(即,经由控制匣50和/或GUI 1005上的“唤醒”按钮选择)。如果直接供电模式代码是0,则电机控制器1002在步骤2026中检验是否存在“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037的按压,如果不是,则电机控制器1002将卧床置于“唤醒”模式2016。如果在处理步骤2024中直接供电模式代码不是0,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2028中检验直接供电模式代码是否为1(即,经由控制匣50上的“直接供电-两种支腿”按钮的选择,(例如)经由按压按钮阵列52、54或按钮53和/或GUI 1005的按钮),如果是的话则在“直接供电-两种支腿”模式中致动卧床。如果在处理步骤2028中直接供电模式代码不是1,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2030中检验直接供电模式代码是否为2(即,经由控制匣50、按钮53和/或GUI 1005上的“直接供电-装载端支腿”按钮的选择),如果是的话,则在“直接供电-装载端支腿”模式中致动卧床。如果在处理步骤2030中直接供电模式代码不是2,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2032中检验直接供电模式代码是否为3(即,经由控制匣50、按钮53和/或GUI 1005上的“直接供电-控制端支腿”按钮的选择),如果是的话,则在“直接供电-控制端支腿”模式中致动卧床。如果在处理步骤2032中直接供电模式代码不是3,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2034中检验直接供电模式代码是否为4(即,经由控制匣50、按钮53和/或GUI 1005上的“设置装载高度”按钮的选择),如果是的话,则在“设置装载高度”模式中致动卧床。如果在处理步骤2034中直接供电模式代码不是4,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2036中检验直接供电模式代码是否为5(即,经由控制匣50、按钮53和/或GUI 1005上的“座椅位置”按钮的选择),如果是的话,则在座椅位置模式中致动卧床。如果在处理步骤2036中直接供电模式代码不是5,则电机控制器1002将卧床置于唤醒模式。如果在处理步骤2026中,电机控制器1002检测到存在对于“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037的按压,则电机控制器1002在处理步骤2038中基于接收到的输入来确定和选择电机状态命令,下文后面的部分中更详细地解释。应了解,在一些实施例中,按钮阵列52、54或按钮53的按钮之一可以用作模式选择按钮,该模式选择按钮允许用户循环通过模式选择序列,每种模式选择具有本文中论述的直接供电模式代码值中的相关联的一个值。例如,在一些实施例中,每个按钮按压循环到下一个模式,并且使得电机控制器1002在GUI 58或1005上显示选定模式的匹配图像。例如,图24A描绘用于选择GUI 1005上显示的直接供电-两种支腿模式的匹配图像,图24B描绘用于选择GUI 1005上显示的直接供电-装载端支腿模式的匹配图像,图24C描绘用于选择GUI 1005上显示的直接供电-控制端支腿模式的匹配图像。图24D描绘用于选择电机控制器1002在GUI 1005上显示的座椅位置模式的匹配图像,后面的部分中予以论述。在一些实施例中,按钮按压序列是:直接供电-两种支腿,对应于直接供电模式代码=1;直接供电-装载端支腿,对应于直接供电模式代码=2;直接供电-控制端支腿,对应于直接供电模式代码=3;设置装载高度,对应于直接供电模式代码=4;以及标准(正常)操作模式,将电机控制器1002置回控制自动操作以下序列:基于传感器输入而移动支腿,以及按压控制匣50上的其它按钮,和/或按压“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037,如本文所论述。In process step 2018, if it is determined that the previous mode was not the "off" mode 2004, then in process step 2020, the motor controller 1002 checks whether the time specified by the wake-up time has passed since the last press of the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037. If so, the motor controller 1002 places the bed in the "sleep" mode 2014. If the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037 is pressed while the bed is in the sleep mode 2014 in step 2022, the motor controller 1002 will then place the bed in the wake-up mode 2016. If the time specified by the wake-up time has not passed since the last press of the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037 in process step 2020, the motor controller 1002 checks in step 2024 whether the direct power mode code is 0 (i.e., selected via the "wake-up" button on the control box 50 and/or GUI 1005). If the direct power mode code is 0, the motor controller 1002 checks in step 2026 whether the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037 has been pressed, and if not, the motor controller 1002 places the bed in the "wake-up" mode 2016. If the direct power mode code is not 0 in process step 2024, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2028 whether the direct power mode code is 1 (i.e., via selection of a "direct power - both legs" button on the control box 50, for example, by pressing the button array 52, 54 or button 53 and/or a button of the GUI 1005), and if so, actuates the bed in the "direct power - both legs" mode. If the direct power mode code is not 1 in process step 2028, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2030 whether the direct power mode code is 2 (i.e., via selection of the "direct power - load end legs" button on the control box 50, button 53, and/or GUI 1005), and if so, activates the couch in the "direct power - load end legs" mode. If the direct power mode code is not 2 in process step 2030, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2032 whether the direct power mode code is 3 (i.e., via selection of the "direct power - control end legs" button on the control box 50, button 53, and/or GUI 1005), and if so, activates the couch in the "direct power - control end legs" mode. If the direct power mode code is not 3 in process step 2032, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2034 whether the direct power mode code is 4 (i.e., via selection of the "Set Loading Height" button on the control box 50, button 53, and/or GUI 1005), and if so, activates the cot in "Set Loading Height" mode. If the direct power mode code is not 4 in process step 2034, the motor controller 1002 checks in process step 2036 whether the direct power mode code is 5 (i.e., via selection of the "Seat Position" button on the control box 50, button 53, and/or GUI 1005), and if so, activates the cot in "Seat Position" mode. If the direct power mode code is not 5 in process step 2036, the motor controller 1002 places the cot in wake-up mode. If, in process step 2026, the motor controller 1002 detects a press of the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037, the motor controller 1002 determines and selects a motor state command based on the received input in process step 2038, as explained in more detail in a later section below. It should be understood that in some embodiments, one of the buttons of the button array 52, 54, or button 53 can be used as a mode selection button that allows the user to cycle through a sequence of mode selections, each mode selection having an associated one of the direct power mode code values discussed herein. For example, in some embodiments, each button press cycles to the next mode and causes the motor controller 1002 to display a matching image for the selected mode on the GUI 58 or 1005. For example, FIG24A depicts a matching image for selecting the direct power-two leg mode displayed on GUI 1005, FIG24B depicts a matching image for selecting the direct power-load-side leg mode displayed on GUI 1005, and FIG24C depicts a matching image for selecting the direct power-control-side leg mode displayed on GUI 1005. FIG24D depicts a matching image for selecting the seat position mode displayed by motor controller 1002 on GUI 1005, which will be discussed in a later section. In some embodiments, the button press sequence is: direct power - both legs, corresponding to direct power mode code = 1; direct power - loading end legs, corresponding to direct power mode code = 2; direct power - control end legs, corresponding to direct power mode code = 3; set loading height, corresponding to direct power mode code = 4; and standard (normal) operating mode, putting the motor controller 1002 back into control of the following sequence of automatic operations: moving the legs based on sensor input, and pressing other buttons on the control box 50, and/or pressing the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037, as discussed herein.

关闭模式和充电模式操作Off-mode and Charge-mode operation

在关闭模式和充电模式操作中,电机控制器1002得到供电,但是电力不传递到致动器16、18,并且灯86、88、89不提供照明。电机控制器1002忽略“+”和“-”操作人员控制按钮1035、1037的任何输入。后面的部分将继续说明错误检测、错误记录和错误代码的更新。如上所述,如果来自用户界面1039的PWR信号是高态,接着如果来自充电器1040的充电电压(ChargeV)不是零,则模式是“充电”,该模式在从电机控制器1002经由有线网络1008发送的消息中设置充电电压存在位。In the off mode and the charging mode of operation, the motor controller 1002 is powered, but power is not delivered to the actuators 16, 18, and the lights 86, 88, 89 do not provide illumination. The motor controller 1002 ignores any input from the "+" and "-" operator control buttons 1035, 1037. The following sections will continue to describe error detection, error logging, and error code updating. As described above, if the PWR signal from the user interface 1039 is high, and then if the charge voltage (ChargeV) from the charger 1040 is not zero, the mode is "Charge", which sets the charge voltage present bit in the message sent from the motor controller 1002 via the wired network 1008.

休眠模式操作Sleep mode operation

在休眠模式操作中,电机控制器1002断电以使电池的能量的功率消耗最小化。在这种模式中,不向致动器传递电力,并且灯1032、1034不提供照明。如果发生输入,即,发生升高/延伸操作人员控制(“+”)按钮1035或降低/缩回操作人员控制(“-”)按钮1037的按压,则一旦释放对按钮1035、1037中的任一个按钮的按压,就将电机控制器1002置于唤醒模式操作。只要唤醒计时器1104尚未到期,下一次“+”/“-”按钮按压接着将如下文的部分所述操作卧床10,从而将电机控制器1002送回如上所述的“休眠”模式。在休眠模式中,电机控制器1002继续监视错误状况。在错误日志文件中记录任何检测到的错误,但是不再发生其它错误处理以使电池的能量的功率消耗最小化。In sleep mode operation, the motor controller 1002 is powered off to minimize power consumption of the battery's energy. In this mode, no power is delivered to the actuators, and the lights 1032 and 1034 do not provide illumination. If an input occurs, i.e., a press of the raise/extend operator control ("+") button 1035 or the lower/retract operator control ("-") button 1037, then upon releasing the press of either button 1035 or 1037, the motor controller 1002 is placed into wake mode operation. As long as the wake timer 1104 has not expired, the next "+" or "-" button press will then operate the bed 10 as described below, thereby returning the motor controller 1002 to "sleep" mode as described above. In sleep mode, the motor controller 1002 continues to monitor for error conditions. Any detected errors are logged in the error log file, but no further error handling occurs to minimize power consumption of the battery's energy.

直接供电-两种支腿、装载端支腿或控制端支腿Direct power supply - two outriggers, load-end outrigger or control-end outrigger

在直接供电-两种支腿模式、直接供电-装载端支腿模式和直接供电-控制端支腿模式中,电机控制器1002继续监视错误状况。在错误日志文件中记录任何检测到的错误。对于任何检测到的错误设置相关联的错误代码位。在这个模式中不发生其它错误处理。电机控制器1002忽略所有传感器(包括角度传感器、接近传感器和支腿状态传感器)以在这些模式中控制支腿的运动。电机状态对于直接供电-控制端支腿模式是5。电机状态对于直接供电-两种支腿模式是6。电机状态对于直接供电-装载端支腿模式是7。In Direct Power - Two Leg Mode, Direct Power - Load Leg Mode, and Direct Power - Control Leg Mode, the motor controller 1002 continues to monitor for error conditions. Any detected errors are recorded in the error log file. The associated error code bit is set for any detected error. No other error handling occurs in this mode. The motor controller 1002 ignores all sensors (including angle sensors, proximity sensors, and leg status sensors) to control leg motion in these modes. The motor status is 5 for Direct Power - Control Leg Mode. The motor status is 6 for Direct Power - Two Leg Mode. The motor status is 7 for Direct Power - Load Leg Mode.

座椅位置模式Seat position mode

在座椅位置模式中,电机控制器1002在GUI 1005上显示图24D中描绘的图像并且忽略“+”按钮1035。在保持“-”按钮1037时,电机控制器1002将卧床10在水平状况中移动到在配置文件1106中预设的座椅位置高度参数。一旦卧床已达到座椅位置高度的水平,装载端支腿将停止移动,并且控制端支腿将以受控制的电力缩回到操作人员座椅高度。如果当按压“-”按钮1037时装载端支腿20已经处在座椅位置高度水平,则在装载端支腿20未移动时,电机控制器1002将直接以受控制的电力速度将控制端支腿40缩回到配置文件1106中预设的操作人员座椅高度。电机状态对于座椅位置模式是9。In the seat position mode, the motor controller 1002 displays the image depicted in FIG. 24D on the GUI 1005 and ignores the "+" button 1035. While the "-" button 1037 is held, the motor controller 1002 moves the couch 10 in a horizontal position to the seat position height parameter preset in the configuration file 1106. Once the couch has reached the seat position height, the load-end legs 20 will stop moving, and the control-end legs 40 will retract to the operator seat height using controlled electrical power. If the load-end legs 20 are already at the seat position height when the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 will directly retract the control-end legs 40 to the operator seat height preset in the configuration file 1106 using controlled electrical power speed if the load-end legs 20 are not moving. The motor state for the seat position mode is 9.

设置装载高度Setting the loading height

在设置模式选择设置装载高度时,电机控制器1002将当前A1值存储在存储器(例如存储器102)中,作为在配置文件1106中提供的预设装载高度。设置相对于致动器杆的延伸度而不是原始电压读数存储于配置文件1106中。当在这种模式中时,电机控制器1002忽略操作人员控制按钮1035、1037。When the set load height is selected in the setup mode, the motor controller 1002 stores the current A1 value in memory (e.g., memory 102) as the preset load height provided in the configuration file 1106. The setting is stored in the configuration file 1106 relative to the extension of the actuator rod, rather than the raw voltage reading. When in this mode, the motor controller 1002 ignores the operator control buttons 1035, 1037.

唤醒模式Wake-up mode

唤醒模式是卧床的标准(完全)操作模式。这种模式允许控制端支腿和装载端支腿的独立支腿移动。Wake-up mode is the standard (full) operating mode of the bed. This mode allows independent leg movement of the control end legs and the loading end legs.

参看图21,电机控制器1002在处理步骤2038(图20)中根据示出的映射使用输入代码信号中的位的值自动确定电机状态。下文提供的后面部分中定义电机状态命令。如下定义输入代码信号的位:位0=D1,位1=D2。还参照图22和图23,图中示出了横向部件64的横截面(沿着图2中描绘的截面线A-A获得),上部致动器横向部件299(图6)可旋转地附接到该横向部件64。如图22和图23所示,横向部件64在由其底面2203限定的空腔2202中提供枢轴盘2200。枢轴盘2200邻近第一末端2204可旋转地附接到横向部件64并且邻近第二末端2206可旋转附接到上部致动器横向部件299,第二末端2206与第一末端2204隔开(即,远离)并且在第一末端2204下方。21 , the motor controller 1002 automatically determines the motor state in process step 2038 ( FIG. 20 ) using the values of the bits in the input code signal according to the mapping shown. The motor state commands are defined in the following section provided below. The bits of the input code signal are defined as follows: Bit 0 = D1, Bit 1 = D2. Referring also to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 , a cross-section of the cross member 64 (taken along the section line A-A depicted in FIG. 2 ) is shown, to which the upper actuator cross member 299 ( FIG. 6 ) is rotatably attached. As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 , the cross member 64 provides a pivot plate 2200 within a cavity 2202 defined by its bottom surface 2203. The pivot plate 2200 is rotatably attached to the cross member 64 adjacent a first end 2204 and is rotatably attached to the upper actuator cross member 299 adjacent a second end 2206 that is spaced apart (ie, distal) from and below the first end 2204 .

如图23所示,枢轴盘2200可以在角度r中围绕第一末端2204旋转,角度r在一个实施例中范围是从0到15度,在其它实施例中范围是从0到30度,并且在再一实施例中范围是从0到45度,或者范围是0与90度之间的任何其它值。如图22所示,当枢轴盘的侧面2208(与致动器横向部件299隔开(即,远离)并且在致动器横向部件299上方)、紧密邻近(即,角度r<3度)、平行于或抵靠着横向部件64的底面2203时,枢轴盘2200处于第一位置X1。打开/关闭传感器1010(图15)检测到第一位置X1并且将其传送到电机控制器1002,该传感器1010可以是(例如)里德开关传感器、霍尔效应传感器、角度传感器或接触开关。因此,当如图22所示传感器1010检测到装载支腿的枢轴盘2200在第一位置X1的方位时位D1设置成1,并且当如图23所示枢轴盘2200处于第二位置X2的方位时位D1设置成0。As shown in FIG23 , the pivot plate 2200 can rotate about the first end 2204 through an angle r ranging from 0 to 15 degrees in one embodiment, from 0 to 30 degrees in other embodiments, and from 0 to 45 degrees in yet another embodiment, or any other value between 0 and 90 degrees. As shown in FIG22 , the pivot plate 2200 is in a first position X1 when the side 2208 of the pivot plate is spaced (i.e., away from) and above the actuator cross member 299, in close proximity (i.e., angle r < 3 degrees), parallel to, or against the bottom surface 2203 of the cross member 64. The open/close sensor 1010 ( FIG15 ), which can be, for example, a reed switch sensor, a Hall effect sensor, an angle sensor, or a contact switch, detects the first position X1 and communicates it to the motor controller 1002. Thus, bit D1 is set to 1 when sensor 1010 detects that the pivot plate 2200 loading the legs is in the first position X1 orientation as shown in FIG. 22 , and is set to 0 when the pivot plate 2200 is in the second position X2 orientation as shown in FIG. 23 .

在一个实施例中,在一个实施例中当角度r>3度时,传感器1010指示第二位置X2。在再一实施例中,当上部致动器横向部件299降低到其在枢轴盘2200处于第一位置X1时的相对位置下方2.5mm时,传感器1010指示第二位置X2。同样,因为控制端支腿的枢轴盘(未图示)与枢轴盘2200相同,所以当如图22所示控制端支腿的枢轴盘处于第一位置X1时位D2设置成1,并且当如图23所示处于第二位置X2时位D2设置成0。In one embodiment, sensor 1010 indicates the second position X2 when angle r is greater than 3 degrees. In yet another embodiment, sensor 1010 indicates the second position X2 when upper actuator cross member 299 is lowered to 2.5 mm below its relative position when pivot plate 2200 is in the first position X1 . Similarly, because the pivot plate (not shown) of the control end leg is identical to pivot plate 2200, bit D2 is set to 1 when the pivot plate of the control end leg is in the first position X1 as shown in FIG. 22, and is set to 0 when the pivot plate of the control end leg is in the second position X2 as shown in FIG. 23.

在另外其它实施例中,应了解,卧床致动系统34在卧床控制系统1000的自动控制下将支撑框架12和该对支腿20、40中的每个支腿互连在一起,并且如前面的部分所述被配置为对支撑框架12相对于支腿20、40中的每个支腿的转轮26、46的高度进行改变。卧床控制系统1000控制卧床致动系统34的激活,并且如上所述被配置为检测卧床致动系统34的一个或两个致动器16、18相对于支撑框架12处在第一方位或位置X1,其中第一方位远离第二方位或位置X2,并且将致动器16和/或18的远离转轮26、46的末端(即,横向部件299)定位成更接近支撑框架12。当存在请求改变支撑框架12相对于支腿20和/或40中的每个支腿的转轮26、46的高度的信号时(诸如按压控制按钮56或60和/或如下文在下面的部分中所示指示这个高度变化的输入代码信号),卧床致动系统1000使得卧床致动系统34的一个或两个致动器16、18根据从一个或多个传感器接收的本文中上文已经论述的感测到的条件的输入将支撑框架12和支腿20和/或40导向成更近或更远。In yet other embodiments, it will be appreciated that the bed actuation system 34 interconnects the support frame 12 and each of the pair of legs 20, 40 under the automatic control of the bed control system 1000 and is configured to vary the height of the support frame 12 relative to the wheels 26, 46 of each of the legs 20, 40 as described in the preceding sections. The bed control system 1000 controls activation of the bed actuation system 34 and, as described above, is configured to detect when one or both actuators 16, 18 of the bed actuation system 34 are in a first orientation or position X1 relative to the support frame 12, wherein the first orientation is distal from a second orientation or position X2 , and to position the ends of the actuators 16 and/or 18 distal from the wheels 26, 46 (i.e., the cross member 299) closer to the support frame 12. When there is a signal requesting a change in the height of the support frame 12 relative to the wheels 26, 46 of each of the legs 20 and/or 40 (such as pressing a control button 56 or 60 and/or an input code signal indicating this height change as shown in the following section), the bed actuation system 1000 causes one or both actuators 16, 18 of the bed actuation system 34 to direct the support frame 12 and legs 20 and/or 40 closer or farther apart based on input received from one or more sensors regarding the sensed conditions discussed above in this document.

返回参看图21,输入代码信号的位2向电机控制器1002指示C1底板条件的状态,并且是根据以下等式确定的:C1&&A1<5%,其中当装载轮接近传感器检测到底板时C1是1,当装载轮接近传感器未检测到底板时C1是0。当装载端致动器杆延伸不到5%时,表达式A1<5%成立(1)。输入代码信号的位3向电机控制器1002指示C2底板条件的状态,并且根据以下等式确定:C2&&A1<1%&&A2<5%,其中当控制端支腿上安装的接近传感器检测到底板时C2是1,当该接近传感器未检测到底板时C2是0。当装载端致动器杆延伸不到1%时,表达式A1<1%成立。当控制端致动器杆延伸不到5%时,表达式A2<5%成立。输入代码信号的位4向电机控制器1002指示中间装载条件或装载角度的状态并且根据以下等式确定:A2-A1>37%&&A1<5%,其中当控制端致动器杆的延伸相对于总的可能延伸比装载端致动器杆的延伸大37%时,表达式A2-A1>37%成立。当装载端致动器杆延伸不到5%时,表达式A1<5%成立。输入代码信号的位5向电机控制器1002指示卧床高度的状态在最大值,并且通过根据以下等式确定:A2&&A1>99%水平范围,这指示控制端致动器杆和装载端致动器杆的延伸都大于99%。Referring back to FIG. 21 , bit 2 of the input code signal indicates to the motor controller 1002 the state of the C1 floor condition and is determined according to the following equation: C1&&A1<5%, where C1 is 1 when the load wheel proximity sensor detects the floor and C1 is 0 when the load wheel proximity sensor does not detect the floor. When the load end actuator rod is extended less than 5%, the expression A1<5% holds true (1). Bit 3 of the input code signal indicates to the motor controller 1002 the state of the C2 floor condition and is determined according to the following equation: C2&&A1<1%&&A2<5%, where C2 is 1 when the control end leg mounted proximity sensor detects the floor and C2 is 0 when the proximity sensor does not detect the floor. When the load end actuator rod is extended less than 1%, the expression A1<1% holds true. When the control end actuator rod is extended less than 5%, the expression A2<5% holds true. Bit 4 of the input code signal indicates to the motor controller 1002 that the intermediate loading condition or loading angle is present and is determined by the following equation: A2-A1>37%&&A1<5%, where the expression A2-A1>37% holds true when the extension of the control-end actuator rod relative to the total possible extension is 37% greater than the extension of the load-end actuator rod. The expression A1<5% holds true when the load-end actuator rod is less than 5% extended. Bit 5 of the input code signal indicates to the motor controller 1002 that the bed height is at the maximum value and is determined by the following equation: A2&&A1>99% horizontal range, which indicates that the extension of both the control-end actuator rod and the load-end actuator rod is greater than 99%.

如图21所示,当输入代码信号位具有24-63范围的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态0。当输入代码信号位具有选自2、6、10、14和18的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态1。当输入代码信号位具有十进制值19时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态1-。当输入代码信号位具有选自1、4、5、9、17、20和21的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态2。当输入代码信号位具有选自22和23的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态2-。当输入代码信号位具有选自3、7、11和15的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态3。当输入代码信号位具有选自8、12和13的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态3-。当输入代码信号位具有选自0和16的十进制值时,电机控件1002自动选择电机状态8。应了解,如上文参照座椅位置模式和直接供电模式所述,操作人员手动地选择电机状态5-9。As shown in FIG21 , when the input code signal bit has a decimal value in the range of 24-63, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 0. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value selected from 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 1. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value of 19, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 1-. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value selected from 1, 4, 5, 9, 17, 20, and 21, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 2. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value selected from 22 and 23, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 2-. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value selected from 3, 7, 11, and 15, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 3. When the input code signal bit has a decimal value selected from 8, 12, and 13, the motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 3-. Motor control 1002 automatically selects motor state 8 when the input code signal bits have a decimal value selected from 0 and 16. It will be appreciated that the operator manually selects motor states 5-9 as described above with reference to the seat position mode and the direct power mode.

支腿状态变化引起的自动停止。当输入代码信号由于D1或D2状态的变化而变化时,电机控制器1002停止移动卧床的支腿,直到重新按压按钮1035、1037中的任一个按钮为止。Automatic Stop Due to Leg State Change: When the input code signal changes due to a change in the D1 or D2 state, the motor controller 1002 stops moving the bed's legs until either button 1035 or 1037 is pressed again.

位置指示灯。当卧床10不附接到充电器1040并且已经符合两种情形中的条件时,位置指示灯1032(诸如在一个实例中实施为线指示器74(图7))在照明(开)。对于第一情形,需要符合以下条件:设置了输入代码信号的装载位,并且控制端支腿在第一位置X1中。当装载支腿的延伸<5%时设置装载位,并且装载端支腿与控制端支腿之间的差异≥40%。对于第二情形,需要符合以下条件:当装载端传感器76“看到”装载表面时,并且控制端支腿在延伸状态(>5%)。Position indicator light. The position indicator light 1032 (such as implemented as the line indicator 74 (Figure 7) in one example) is illuminated (on) when the bed 10 is not attached to the charger 1040 and the conditions in two situations have been met. For the first situation, the following conditions need to be met: the loading position of the input code signal is set, and the control end leg is in the first position X1 . The loading position is set when the extension of the loading leg is <5%, and the difference between the loading end leg and the control end leg is ≥40%. For the second situation, the following conditions need to be met: when the loading end sensor 76 "sees" the loading surface, and the control end leg is in the extended state (>5%).

电机状态内的运动Movement within the motor state

电机状态0:在这个电机状态中,电机控制器1002忽略对按钮1035、1037的任何按压,使得装载端螺线管致动器1036和控制端螺线管致动器1038都不被激活,使得支腿20、40既不延伸也不缩回。Motor State 0: In this motor state, the motor controller 1002 ignores any presses of the buttons 1035, 1037, so that neither the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 nor the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 is activated, so that the legs 20, 40 are neither extended nor retracted.

电机状态1:在按压“+”按钮1035时,电机控制器1002使得装载端螺线管致动器1036以最大可能速度在开环模式中延伸装载端支腿20。控制端螺线管致动器1038不被电机控制器1002激活,使得控制端支腿40不移动。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,电机控制器1002使得装载端螺线管致动器1036以最大可能速度在开环模式中缩回装载端支腿20。控制端螺线管致动器1038不被电机控制器1002激活,使得除非符合下文描述的升档(Kickup)模式条件,否则控制端支腿40不移动。Motor State 1: When the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 causes the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 to extend the load-end leg 20 in an open-loop mode at the maximum possible speed. The control-end solenoid actuator 1038 is not activated by the motor controller 1002, so that the control-end leg 40 does not move. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 causes the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 to retract the load-end leg 20 in an open-loop mode at the maximum possible speed. The control-end solenoid actuator 1038 is not activated by the motor controller 1002, so that the control-end leg 40 does not move unless the kickup mode conditions described below are met.

升档模式:当输入代码信号从2转变成18(即,装载端支腿20充分缩回以设置中间装载条件)时,电机控制器1002将使控制端支腿40自动延伸到在配置文件1106中限定的升档高度。如果在升档时间(在配置文件1106中预定义的倒计时器时间)到期之后控制端支腿40还未延伸到升档高度,则电机控制器1002将停止延伸控制端支腿40的尝试。这个动作防止电机控制器1002继续试图延伸已经在其最大可能延伸度的控制端支腿40。只要“-”按钮1037被按压并且装载端支腿20尚未达到其最大缩回度,在升档模式期间,装载端支腿20将继续被电机控制器1002缩回。在升档时间计时器到期之后并且当装载端支腿20已达到其最大缩回度时,电机控制器1002使装载致动器18停止。Upshift Mode: When the input code signal transitions from 2 to 18 (i.e., the loading-end legs 20 are fully retracted to establish an intermediate loading condition), the motor controller 1002 automatically extends the control-end legs 40 to the upshift height defined in the configuration file 1106. If the control-end legs 40 have not been extended to the upshift height after the upshift time (a countdown timer predefined in the configuration file 1106) expires, the motor controller 1002 stops attempting to extend the control-end legs 40. This action prevents the motor controller 1002 from continuing to attempt to extend the control-end legs 40, which are already at their maximum possible extension. As long as the "-" button 1037 is pressed and the loading-end legs 20 have not yet reached their maximum retraction, the loading-end legs 20 will continue to be retracted by the motor controller 1002 during the upshift mode. After the upshift time timer expires and when the loading-end legs 20 have reached their maximum retraction, the motor controller 1002 deactivates the loading actuator 18.

电机状态1-:在这个电机状态中,按压“+”按钮1035不会使电机控制器1002激活螺线管致动器1036、1038,但是按压“-”按钮1037会使电机控制器1002激活装载端螺线管致动器1036,从而使得装载端支腿20以最大可能速度在开环模式中缩回。此外,控制端螺线管致动器1038不移动,使得控制端支腿40保持在相同高度。Motor State 1-: In this motor state, pressing the "+" button 1035 does not cause the motor controller 1002 to activate the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038. However, pressing the "-" button 1037 causes the motor controller 1002 to activate the load-end solenoid actuator 1036, thereby retracting the load-end leg 20 in open-loop mode at the maximum possible speed. Furthermore, the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 does not move, causing the control-end leg 40 to remain at the same height.

电机状态2:在这个电机状态中,按压“+”按钮1035使得电机控制器1002仅仅激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40以最大可能速度在开环模式中延伸。在按压“-”按钮1037时,电机控制器1002仅仅激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40以最大可能速度在开环模式中缩回。Motor State 2: In this motor state, pressing the "+" button 1035 causes the motor controller 1002 to activate only the control end solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control end leg 40 to extend in open loop mode at the maximum possible speed. When pressing the "-" button 1037, the motor controller 1002 activates only the control end solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control end leg 40 to retract in open loop mode at the maximum possible speed.

电机状态2-:在这个电机状态中,电机控制器1002忽略对“+”按钮1035的任何按压,使得装载端螺线管致动器1036和控制端螺线管致动器1038都不被激活,使得支腿20、40不延伸。在按压“-”按钮1037时,电机控制器1002将激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40以配置文件1106中提供的降档电力(KickDownPower)参数指定的电力设置在开环模式中缩回。Motor State 2-: In this motor state, the motor controller 1002 ignores any presses of the "+" button 1035, causing neither the load-side solenoid actuator 1036 nor the control-side solenoid actuator 1038 to be activated, causing the legs 20, 40 to not extend. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates the control-side solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control-side leg 40 to retract in open-loop mode at the power setting specified by the KickDownPower parameter provided in the configuration file 1106.

电机状态3:在按压“+”按钮1035并且装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40的延伸度在操作范围的2%内相等时,电机控制器1002使装载端螺线管致动器1036以配置文件1106中的升高电力指定的电力设置延伸装载端支腿20。此外,电机控制器1002激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40在追踪模式(追踪装载支腿的位置)中延伸。当支腿20、40到达通过在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且从配置文件1106或脚本1100读取的运输高度参数确定的第一停止位置时,电机控制器1002停止支腿20、40的延伸。为了继续支腿20、40的延伸,“+”按钮1035已被释放并且重新按压。当在停止在运输高度停止位置之后重新按压“+”按钮1035时,电机控制器1002将再次延伸支腿20、40,直到该支腿到达装载高度停止位置为止。为了超出装载高度停止位置继续延伸支腿20、40直到其最大可能延伸度度(最高水平高度停止位置(A1=99%,A2=99%))为止,“+”按钮1035将再次必须被释放和重新按压。Motor State 3: When the "+" button 1035 is pressed and the extension of the load-end legs 20 and control-end legs 40 are equal within 2% of the operating range, the motor controller 1002 causes the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 to extend the load-end legs 20 at the power setting specified by the "Raise Power" in the configuration file 1106. Furthermore, the motor controller 1002 activates the control-end solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control-end legs 40 to extend in tracking mode (tracking the position of the load-end legs). When the legs 20, 40 reach the first stop position determined by the transport height parameters preset in and read from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100, the motor controller 1002 stops extension of the legs 20, 40. To continue extension of the legs 20, 40, the "+" button 1035 must be released and re-pressed. When the "+" button 1035 is pressed again after stopping at the transport height stop position, the motor controller 1002 will extend the legs 20, 40 again until the legs reach the loading height stop position. In order to continue extending the legs 20, 40 beyond the loading height stop position to their maximum possible extension (the highest horizontal stop position (A1=99%, A2=99%)), the "+" button 1035 will again have to be released and pressed again.

应了解,如果装载高度停止位置设置在运输高度停止位置的0.2英寸(5.08mm)(在致动器杆上测量的)内,则电机控制器1002忽略在装载高度停止位置的停止。在现场操作期间,当由于错误和/或为了当前护理需要可能必须停用装载高度停止位置时,这个特征是有用的。当电机控制器1002开始经由螺线管致动器1036、1038的激活而移动支腿20、40时,支腿延伸速度将在软开始加速升高参数指定的时间段中从开始升高电力速度(即,第一电力设置参数)斜变成升高电力参数设置(第二电力设置参数,其大于第一电力设置参数,这样相对于卧床在第一电力设置参数下升高会使得卧床升高得更快)的速度,其中所有参数都是电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100预设和读取的。在操作人员释放“+”按钮1035之后,电机控制器1002将在软停止参数指定的时间段中使支腿延伸速度斜降到开始升高电力速度(即,第一电力额定参数),其中所有参数也都是电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100预设和读取的。如果来自传感器1022的ChargeV信号值(或者按照电池控制器1006经由电池通信消息报告的)小于开始升高电力,则电机控制器1002将到螺线管致动器1036、1038的输出电力设置成零(0)伏。当在趋近运输高度停止位置时,电机控制器1002将在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设的升高距离校正值参数指定的距离上将支腿缩回速度(即,输出到螺线管致动器1036、1038的电力)斜降成零(0)。电机控制器1002将不会使装载或控制端支腿移动超过最高水平高度参数。如果当进入电机状态3时装载或控制端支腿已经在最高水平高度范围以外,则直到按压“-”按钮1037时,电机控制器1002才会将支腿缩回水平范围中。It will be appreciated that if the loading height stop position is set within 0.2 inches (5.08 mm) of the transport height stop position (measured on the actuator stem), the motor controller 1002 ignores stops at the loading height stop position. This feature is useful during field operation when the loading height stop position may have to be deactivated due to an error and/or for current care needs. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the legs 20, 40 via activation of the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, the leg extension speed will ramp from the starting raise power speed (i.e., the first power setting parameter) to the raise power parameter setting (a second power setting parameter that is greater than the first power setting parameter so that the bed is raised faster than when raised at the first power setting parameter) over the time period specified by the soft start acceleration raise parameters, all of which are preset and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. After the operator releases the "+" button 1035, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg extension speed down to the start raise power speed (i.e., the first power rating parameter) over the time period specified by the soft stop parameters, all of which are also preset and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. If the ChargeV signal value from the sensor 1022 (or as reported by the battery controller 1006 via battery communication messages) is less than the start raise power, the motor controller 1002 will set the output power to the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 to zero (0) volts. When approaching the transport height stop position, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed (i.e., the power output to the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038) to zero (0) over the distance specified by the Raise Distance Correction Value parameter preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. The motor controller 1002 will not move the load or control end legs beyond the maximum level parameter. If the loading or control end legs are already outside the highest level range when entering motor state 3, the motor controller 1002 will not retract the legs into the horizontal range until the "-" button 1037 is pressed.

在“-”按钮1037被按压并且装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40的延伸在操作范围的2%内相等时,电机控制器1002将激活装载端螺线管致动器1036,使得装载端支腿20以从配置文件1106或脚本1100预设和读取的降低电力参数指定的电力设置缩回。电机控制器1002还使控制端螺线管致动器1038在追踪模式中(追踪装载支腿的位置)缩回控制端支腿40。电机控制器1002在支腿20、40到达运输高度停止位置时将停止缩回该支腿,并且直到“-”按钮1037已被释放并且重新按压时才继续缩回到运输高度停止位置以下。When the "-" button 1037 is pressed and the extension of the loading-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 are equal within 2% of the operating range, the motor controller 1002 will activate the loading-end solenoid actuator 1036 to retract the loading-end legs 20 at the power setting specified by the reduced power parameters preset and read from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. The motor controller 1002 also causes the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 to retract the control-end legs 40 in a tracking mode (tracking the position of the loading legs). The motor controller 1002 will stop retracting the legs 20, 40 when they reach the transport height stop position and will not continue to retract below the transport height stop position until the "-" button 1037 has been released and repressed.

当电机控制器1002开始经由激活螺线管致动器1036、1038而移动支腿20、40时,支腿缩回速度将在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中从开始降低电力速度(第三电力设置参数)斜变成通过降低电力速度(第四电力设置参数,其大于第三电力设置参数,使得相对于卧床在第三电力设置参数下降低时,卧床降低得更快)设置的速度,其中所有参数都是在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且由电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100中读取的。在操作人员释放“-”按钮1037之后,电机控制器1002将在软停止参数指定的时间段中将支腿缩回速度斜降到开始降低电力速度参数。如上所述,如果传感器1002或电池控制器1006报告的电力小于软降低电力参数,则电机控制器1002将到螺线管致动器1036、1038的输出电力设置成零(0)伏。当趋近最低水平高度停止位置(通过电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100预设和读取)时,电机控制器1002将在降低距离校正值参数指定的距离上使支腿缩回速度斜降到零(0)伏,降低距离校正值参数也在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且由电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100中读取。电机控制器1002将不使装载端支腿20或控制端支腿40中的任一种支腿移动超过最低水平高度停止位置。如果当进入电机状态3时装载端支腿20或控制端支腿40中的任一种支腿已经在最低水平高度停止位置范围以外,则直到“+”按钮1035被按压时,电机控制器1002才会使支腿缩回水平范围中。在“+”或“-”按钮1035或1037被保持并且支腿20、40以超过相应螺线管致动器1036、1038的操作范围的2%的不相等程度延伸时,电机控制器1002仅仅自动移动需要在按钮按压方向上行进以均衡支腿延伸的支腿(即,支腿20或40)。一旦角度传感器1018感测到支腿20、40已达到相等的延伸度(A1=A2),电机控制器1002接着将如上文在前面的部分所述同时延伸/缩回支腿20、40。控制器1002执行上述自动均衡功能以确保卧床10的水平升高或降低。应了解,最低水平高度停止位置是设定值,并且卧床10将基于来自角度传感器的反馈而在这个高度停止降低。如果卧床10在这个高度以上停止降低,则按压“-”按钮1037将使单元降低到停止位置高度。在这个高度,进一步按压“-”按钮1037不会进行任何动作,而如果符合本文中论述的延伸条件,则按压“+”按钮1035将升高卧床10。卧床10的这个功能性能防止按钮1035或1037在卧床10完全缩回并且装载在急救运输工具中时移动卧床10。When the motor controller 1002 begins to move the legs 20, 40 by activating the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, the leg retraction speed will ramp from the start lowering power speed (third power setting parameter) to the speed set by the lowering power speed (fourth power setting parameter, which is greater than the third power setting parameter so that the bed lowers faster than when it is lowered at the third power setting parameter) over a period of time specified by the soft lowering acceleration reduction parameter, wherein all parameters are preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. After the operator releases the "-" button 1037, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed back to the start lowering power speed parameter over a period of time specified by the soft stop parameter. As described above, if the power reported by the sensor 1002 or the battery controller 1006 is less than the soft lowering power parameter, the motor controller 1002 sets the output power to the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 to zero (0) volts. When approaching the lowest level stop (preset and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100), the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed down to zero (0) volts over the distance specified by the lowering distance correction value parameter, which is also preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. The motor controller 1002 will not move either the load end leg 20 or the control end leg 40 beyond the lowest level stop. If either the load end leg 20 or the control end leg 40 is already outside the lowest level stop range when entering motor state 3, the motor controller 1002 will not retract the legs into the horizontal range until the "+" button 1035 is pressed. When the "+" or "-" button 1035 or 1037 is held and the legs 20, 40 are extended to unequal degrees exceeding 2% of the operating range of the respective solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, the motor controller 1002 automatically moves only the leg (i.e., leg 20 or 40) that needs to travel in the direction of the button press to equalize leg extension. Once the angle sensor 1018 senses that the legs 20, 40 have reached equal extension (A1 = A2), the motor controller 1002 will then simultaneously extend/retract the legs 20, 40 as described above in the previous section. The controller 1002 performs the aforementioned automatic equalization function to ensure that the level of the couch 10 is raised or lowered. It should be understood that the lowest level stop position is a set value, and the couch 10 will stop lowering at this height based on feedback from the angle sensor. If the couch 10 stops lowering above this height, pressing the "-" button 1037 will lower the unit to the stop position height. At this height, further pressing of the "-" button 1037 will do nothing, whereas pressing of the "+" button 1035 will raise the bed 10 if the extension conditions discussed herein are met. This functionality of the bed 10 prevents the buttons 1035 or 1037 from moving the bed 10 when it is fully retracted and stowed in an emergency transport.

电机状态3-:当在这个电机状态中时,电机控制器1002将不对“+”按钮1035上的任何按压作出响应,这样使得装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40都不移动。在“-”按钮1037被按压并且装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40的延伸在操作范围的2%内(例如10mm)相等时,电机控制器1002将使得装载端螺线管致动器1036以从配置文件1106或脚本1100中提供的降低电力参数指定的电力设置缩回装载端支腿20。此外,电机控制器1002使控制端螺线管致动器1038在追踪模式中(追踪装载支腿的位置)缩回控制端支腿40。电机控制器1002将在支腿20、40到达运输高度停止位置时停止缩回这些支腿,并且直到“-”按钮1037已被释放并且重新按压时,才会继续缩回支腿20、40。在“-”按钮1037已被释放并且重新按压之后,当再次开始移动支腿20、40时,电机控制器1002将在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中使支腿缩回速度从开始降低电力速度斜变成降低电力速度参数设置的速度。在操作人员释放“-”按钮1037之后,电机控制器1002将在软停止参数指定的时间段中将支腿缩回速度斜降到开始降低电力速度参数。如果来自传感器1022的ChargeV信号指示的电力或电池控制器1006在通信消息中指示的电力小于开始降低电力速度,则电机控制器1002向螺线管致动器1036、1038提供的输出电力设置成零(0)伏。当趋近最低水平高度停止位置时,电机控制器1002将在降低距离校正值参数指定的距离中使支腿缩回速度斜降到零(0)伏。电机控制器1002将不使装载端支腿20或控制端支腿40中的任一种支腿移动超过最低水平高度停止位置。Motor State 3-: When in this motor state, the motor controller 1002 will not respond to any presses on the "+" button 1035, so that neither the load-end leg 20 nor the control-end leg 40 moves. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed and the extension of the load-end leg 20 and the control-end leg 40 is equal within 2% of the operating range (e.g., 10 mm), the motor controller 1002 will cause the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 to retract the load-end leg 20 at the power setting specified by the reduced power parameters provided in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. In addition, the motor controller 1002 causes the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 to retract the control-end leg 40 in tracking mode (tracking the position of the load-end leg). The motor controller 1002 will stop retracting the legs 20, 40 when they reach the transport height stop position and will not continue to retract the legs 20, 40 until the "-" button 1037 has been released and re-pressed. After the "-" button 1037 has been released and re-pressed, when the legs 20, 40 begin to move again, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed from the start lowering power speed to the speed set by the lowering power speed parameter over the time period specified by the soft lowering acceleration reduction parameter. After the operator releases the "-" button 1037, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed back to the start lowering power speed parameter over the time period specified by the soft stop parameter. If the power indicated by the ChargeV signal from the sensor 1022 or the power indicated by the battery controller 1006 in the communication message is less than the start lowering power speed, the output power provided by the motor controller 1002 to the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 is set to zero (0) volts. When approaching the lowest level stop, the motor controller 1002 will ramp the leg retraction speed down to zero (0) volts over the distance specified by the decrease distance correction value parameter. The motor controller 1002 will not move either the load-end leg 20 or the control-end leg 40 beyond the lowest level stop.

电机控制器1002将不使支腿20、40移动超出最低水平高度停止位置。如果当进入电机状态3时支腿20、40中的任一种或两种支腿已经在最低水平高度范围以外,则直到按压“+”按钮1035时,电机控制器1002才会将支腿缩回水平范围中。在“-”按钮1037被保持并且支腿以超过操作范围的2%的不相等程度延伸时,只有需要缩回以均衡支腿延伸的该对支腿20或40将会移动。一旦支腿已达到相等的延伸度(即,A1=A2),就将如上文在前面的部分中所述通过电机控制器1002使这些支腿缩回。The motor controller 1002 will not move the legs 20, 40 beyond the lowest level stop. If either or both legs 20, 40 are already outside the lowest level range when entering motor state 3, the motor controller 1002 will not retract the legs into the horizontal range until the "+" button 1035 is pressed. If the "-" button 1037 is held and the legs are extended to unequal degrees exceeding 2% of the operating range, only the pair of legs 20 or 40 that need to be retracted to equalize leg extension will move. Once the legs have reached equal extension (i.e., A1 = A2), they will be retracted by the motor controller 1002 as described above in the previous section.

电机状态5:在这个电机状态中,当“+”按钮1035被按压时,电机控制器1002通过如下方式作出响应:仅仅激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40以减少升高电力参数设置的电力水平延伸,该减少升高电力参数在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且通过电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100读取。当电机控制器1002开始移动控制端支腿40时,支腿延伸速度在软开始加速升高参数指定的时间段中从开始升高电力速度斜变成减少升高电力参数设置的速度。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,电机控制器1002仅仅激活控制端螺线管致动器1038,使得控制端支腿40以减少降低电力参数设置的电力水平缩回。当电机控制器1002开始移动控制端支腿40时,支腿缩回速度在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中从开始降低电力速度斜变成降低电力参数设置的速度。Motor State 5: In this motor state, when the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 responds by activating only the control end solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control end leg 40 to extend at a power level set by the reduced power parameter, which is preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the control end leg 40, the leg extension speed ramps from the start power speed to the speed set by the reduced power parameter over the time period specified by the soft start acceleration parameter. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates only the control end solenoid actuator 1038, causing the control end leg 40 to retract at a power level set by the reduced power parameter. When the motor controller 1002 begins to move the control end leg 40, the leg retraction speed is ramped from the start reduced power speed to the speed set by the reduced power parameter over the time period specified by the soft reduce acceleration reduction parameter.

电机状态6:当在这个电机状态中时,在“+”按钮1035被按压时,电机控制器1002激活两个螺线管致动器1036、1038,使得这两种支腿20、40都以减少升高电力参数设置的电力水平延伸。当电机控制器1002开始移动支腿20、40时,电机控制器1002使支腿延伸速度在软开始加速升高参数指定的时间段中从开始升高电力速度斜变成减少升高电力参数设置的速度。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,电机控制器1002激活螺线管致动器1036、1038,使得这两种支腿20、40都以减少降低电力参数设置的电力水平缩回。当电机控制器1002开始移动支腿20、40时,电机控制器1002使支腿延伸速度在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中从开始降低电力速度斜变成减少降低电力参数设置的速度。Motor State 6: When in this motor state, when the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates both solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, causing both legs 20, 40 to extend at the power level set by the Reduced Raise Power parameter. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the legs 20, 40, the motor controller 1002 ramps the leg extension speed from the start-up power speed to the speed set by the Reduced Raise Power parameter over the time period specified by the Soft Start Acceleration Raise parameter. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, causing both legs 20, 40 to retract at the power level set by the Reduced Lower Power parameter. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the legs 20, 40, the motor controller 1002 ramps the leg extension speed from the start-down power speed to the speed set by the Reduced Lower Power parameter over the time period specified by the Soft Start Acceleration Decrease parameter.

电机状态7:在这个电机状态中,当“+”按钮1035被按压时,电机控制器1002通过如下方式作出响应:仅仅激活装载端螺线管致动器1036,使得装载端支腿20以减少升高电力参数设置的电力水平延伸,该减少升高电力参数在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且通过电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100读取。当电机控制器1002开始移动装载端支腿20时,支腿延伸速度在软开始加速升高参数指定的时间段中从开始升高电力速度斜变成减少升高电力参数设置的速度。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,电机控制器1002仅仅激活装载端螺线管致动器1036,使得装载端支腿20以减少降低电力参数设置的电力水平缩回。当电机控制器1002开始移动装载端支腿20时,支腿缩回速度在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中从开始降低电力速度斜变成降低电力参数设置的速度。Motor State 7: In this motor state, when the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 responds by activating only the load-end solenoid actuator 1036, causing the load-end legs 20 to extend at a power level set by the Reduce Raise Power parameter, which is preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read by the motor controller 1002 from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the load-end legs 20, the leg extension speed ramps from the start raise power speed to the speed set by the Reduce Raise Power parameter over the time period specified by the Soft Start Acceleration Raise parameter. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates only the load-end solenoid actuator 1036, causing the load-end legs 20 to retract at a power level set by the Reduce Raise Power parameter. When the motor controller 1002 begins moving the load end legs 20, the leg retraction speed is ramped from the start reduced power speed to the speed set by the reduced power parameter over the time period specified by the soft reduce acceleration reduction parameter.

电机状态8:当在这个电机状态中时,在“+”按钮1035被按压时,电机控制器1002激活螺线管致动器1036、1038,使得支腿20、40以最大电力延伸。在“-”按钮1037被按压时,电机控制器1002激活这两个螺线管致动器1036、1038,使得支腿20、40以最大电力缩回。Motor State 8: When in this motor state, when the "+" button 1035 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, causing the legs 20, 40 to extend at full power. When the "-" button 1037 is pressed, the motor controller 1002 activates both solenoid actuators 1036, 1038, causing the legs 20, 40 to retract at full power.

电机状态9:在这个电机状态中,当“-”按钮1037被按压时,如果控制端支腿40不在座椅位置高度参数的座椅位置公差距离参数(这两个参数都在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且通过电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100中读取)以内,并且如果装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40的延伸在操作范围的2%内相等,并且装载端支腿20的延伸程度小于座椅位置高度参数-座椅位置公差距离的结果,则电机控制器1002使装载端螺线管致动器1036让装载端支腿20以升高电力参数指定的电力设置延伸,升高电力参数在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设,并且通过电机控制器1002从配置文件1106或脚本1100中读取。此外,电机控制器1002使控制端螺线管致动器1038在追踪模式中(追踪装载支腿的位置)延伸控制端支腿40。电机控制器1002在支腿20、40达到座椅高度位置时停止延伸该支腿。与其它模式中一样,当支腿开始移动时,电机控制器1002使支腿延伸速度在软开始加速升高参数指定的时间段中从开始升高电力速度斜变成升高电力参数设置的速度。在操作人员释放“-”按钮1037之后,电机控制器1002在软停止参数指定的时间段中将支腿延伸速度斜降到开始升高电力速度参数。如果传感器1022或电池控制器1006报告的电力小于开始升高电力速度参数,则电机控制器1002将到螺线管致动器1036、1038的输出电力设置成零(0)伏。Motor State 9: In this motor state, when the “-” button 1037 is pressed, if the control end leg 40 is not within the seat position tolerance distance parameter of the seat position height parameter (both parameters are preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 by the motor controller 1002), and if the extension of the load end leg 20 and the control end leg 40 are equal within 2% of the operating range, and the extension of the load end leg 20 is less than the result of the seat position height parameter - seat position tolerance distance, then the motor controller 1002 causes the load end solenoid actuator 1036 to extend the load end leg 20 at the power setting specified by the raise power parameter, which is preset in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 and read from the configuration file 1106 or script 1100 by the motor controller 1002. In addition, the motor controller 1002 causes the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 to extend the control-end leg 40 in tracking mode (tracking the position of the loaded leg). The motor controller 1002 stops extending the leg 20, 40 when it reaches the seat height position. As in other modes, when the leg begins to move, the motor controller 1002 causes the leg extension speed to ramp from the start-up power speed to the speed set by the increase power parameter over the time period specified by the soft start acceleration increase parameter. After the operator releases the "-" button 1037, the motor controller 1002 ramps the leg extension speed back to the start-up power speed parameter over the time period specified by the soft stop parameter. If the power reported by the sensor 1022 or the battery controller 1006 is less than the start-up power speed parameter, the motor controller 1002 sets the output power to the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 to zero (0) volts.

在趋近座椅位置高度时,电机控制器1002使支腿缩回速度在升高距离校正值参数指定的距离上斜降成零(0)伏。如果装载端支腿20和控制端支腿40的延伸在操作范围(?)的2%内相等,并且装载端支腿20的延伸超过座椅位置高度+座椅位置公差,则电机控制器1002使装载端螺线管致动器1036以配置文件1106或脚本1100中提供的降低电力参数指定的电力设置缩回装载端支腿20。此外,电机控制器1002使控制端螺线管致动器1038在追踪模式中(追踪装载支腿的位置)缩回控制端支腿40。卧床的支腿在达到座椅位置高度参数的位置时停止缩回。As the seat height is approached, the motor controller 1002 causes the leg retraction velocity to ramp down to zero (0) volts over the distance specified by the Raise Distance Correction Value parameter. If the extension of the load-end legs 20 and the control-end legs 40 is equal within 2% of the operating range (?), and the extension of the load-end legs 20 exceeds the seat height + seat position tolerance, the motor controller 1002 causes the load-end solenoid actuator 1036 to retract the load-end legs 20 at a power setting specified by the Reduce Power parameter provided in the configuration file 1106 or script 1100. In addition, the motor controller 1002 causes the control-end solenoid actuator 1038 to retract the control-end legs 40 in a tracking mode (tracking the position of the load legs). The berth legs stop retracting when the position of the seat height parameter is reached.

与其它模式中一样,当电机控制器1002开始移动支腿20、40时,支腿缩回速度在软降低加速降低参数指定的时间段中从开始降低电力速度斜变成降低电力参数设置的速度。在操作人员释放“-”按钮1037之后,支腿缩回速度将在软停止参数指定的时间段中斜降成开始降低电力速度。如果传感器1022或电池控制器1006报告的电力小于软降低电力速度需要的电力,则电机控制器1002将输出电力设置成零(0)伏。在趋近座椅位置高度参数的位置时,支腿缩回速度将在降低距离校正值参数指定的距离中斜降成零(0)。如果支腿20、40的延伸的不相等程度超过操作范围(?)的2%,则进一步的支腿移动将取决于装载端支腿20相对于控制端支腿40和座椅位置高度的位置。如果卧床10处于使得装载端支腿20在座椅位置高度上方而控制端支腿40低于装载端支腿20并且低于座椅位置高度的位置,则电机控制器1002将装载端支腿20缩回到其座椅位置高度,然后将控制端支腿40缩回到其操作人员座椅高度。As in other modes, when the motor controller 1002 begins to move the outriggers 20, 40, the outrigger retraction speed ramps from the start power reduction speed to the speed set by the reduce power parameter over the time period specified by the soft reduce acceleration reduction parameter. After the operator releases the "-" button 1037, the outrigger retraction speed will ramp down to the start power reduction speed over the time period specified by the soft stop parameter. If the power reported by the sensor 1022 or the battery controller 1006 is less than the power required for the soft reduce power speed, the motor controller 1002 sets the output power to zero (0) volts. As the position of the seat position height parameter is approached, the outrigger retraction speed will ramp down to zero (0) over the distance specified by the reduce distance correction value parameter. If the unequal extension of the outriggers 20, 40 exceeds 2% of the operating range (?), further outrigger movement will depend on the position of the load-end outrigger 20 relative to the control-end outrigger 40 and the seat position height. If the bed 10 is in a position such that the loading end legs 20 are above the seat position height and the control end legs 40 are below the loading end legs 20 and below the seat position height, the motor controller 1002 retracts the loading end legs 20 to their seat position height and then retracts the control end legs 40 to their operator seat height.

如果卧床10处于使得装载端支腿20在座椅位置高度上方并且控制端支腿低于装载端支腿20但是高于座椅位置高度的位置,则电机控制器1002将装载端支腿20缩回成与控制端支腿40齐平,接着电机控制器1002将支腿20、40均匀地缩回到座椅位置高度,然后电机控制器1002将控制端支腿40缩回到其操作人员座椅高度。如果卧床处于使得装载端支腿在座椅位置高度上方并且控制端支腿40在装载端支腿20上方的位置,则电机控制器1002将控制端支腿40缩回成与装载端支腿20齐平,然后电机控制器1002将这两种支腿均匀地缩回到座椅位置高度,然后控制端支腿40缩回到其操作人员座椅高度。If the berth 10 is in a position such that the loading-end legs 20 are above seat height and the control-end legs are lower than the loading-end legs 20 but above seat height, the motor controller 1002 retracts the loading-end legs 20 to be flush with the control-end legs 40, then the motor controller 1002 retracts the legs 20, 40 evenly to seat height, and then the motor controller 1002 retracts the control-end legs 40 to their operator seat height. If the berth is in a position such that the loading-end legs are above seat height and the control-end legs 40 are above the loading-end legs 20, the motor controller 1002 retracts the control-end legs 40 to be flush with the loading-end legs 20, then the motor controller 1002 retracts both legs evenly to seat height, and then the control-end legs 40 to their operator seat height.

如果卧床处于使得装载端支腿20低于座椅位置高度并且控制端支腿低于装载端支腿20的位置,则将控制端支腿40延伸成与装载端支腿20齐平,然后将这两种支腿均匀地延伸到座椅位置高度,然后将控制端支腿40缩回到操作人员座椅高度。如果卧床10处于使得装载端支腿20低于座椅位置高度并且控制端支腿40高于装载端支腿20但是低于座椅位置高度的位置,则将装载端支腿20延伸成与控制端支腿40齐平,然后将这两种支腿20、40均匀地延伸到座椅位置高度,然后将控制端支腿40缩回到其操作人员座椅高度。If the berth is in a position such that the loading-end legs 20 are below seat height and the control-end legs are below the loading-end legs 20, the control-end legs 40 are extended to be flush with the loading-end legs 20, both legs are then extended evenly to seat height, and the control-end legs 40 are then retracted to operator seat height. If the berth 10 is in a position such that the loading-end legs 20 are below seat height and the control-end legs 40 are above the loading-end legs 20 but below seat height, the loading-end legs 20 are extended to be flush with the control-end legs 40, both legs 20, 40 are then extended evenly to seat height, and the control-end legs 40 are then retracted to their operator seat height.

如果卧床处于使得装载端支腿20低于座椅位置高度并且控制端支腿40高于装载端支腿20并且还高于座椅位置高度的位置,则将装载端支腿20延伸到座椅位置高度然后将控制端支腿40缩回到操作人员座椅高度。如果装载端支腿20在座椅位置高度的座椅位置公差内,则在控制端螺线管致动器1038被电机控制器1002激活以使得控制端支腿40以减少的电力水平缩回到操作人员座椅高度时,电机控制器1002将不会使装载端螺线管致动器1036移动装载端支腿20。If the berth is in a position such that the loading end legs 20 are below seat height and the control end legs 40 are above the loading end legs 20 and also above seat height, the loading end legs 20 are extended to seat height and then the control end legs 40 are retracted to operator seat height. If the loading end legs 20 are within the seat position tolerance of seat height, the motor controller 1002 will not cause the loading end solenoid actuator 1036 to move the loading end legs 20 when the control end solenoid actuator 1038 is activated by the motor controller 1002 to retract the control end legs 40 to the operator seat height at a reduced power level.

与模式无关的操作Mode-independent operations

以下操作模式与任何电机模式操作无关:USB数据传送状态、电池电压监视、数据记录、错误检测和配置文件执行和更新。当在USB数据传送模式中时,诸如在个人计算机或智能电子装置上设置的外部控制器实用工具能够读取电机控制器日志文件。此控制器实用工具的一个合适的示例是RoboteQ(Scottsdale,AZ)的Roborunt。从控制器实用工具可以向控制器实施软件版本更新并且为角度传感器校准最大高度和最小高度。控制器实用工具还可以显示图15中描绘的电机控制器1002的模拟/数字输入和输出的状态和值。The following operating modes are independent of any motor mode operation: USB data transfer status, battery voltage monitoring, data logging, error detection, and configuration file execution and updating. While in USB data transfer mode, an external controller utility, such as one provided on a personal computer or intelligent electronic device, can read the motor controller log file. A suitable example of such a controller utility is Roborunt from RoboteQ (Scottsdale, AZ). From the controller utility, software version updates can be applied to the controller and the maximum and minimum heights for the angle sensor can be calibrated. The controller utility can also display the status and values of the analog/digital inputs and outputs of the motor controller 1002 depicted in FIG15.

对于电池电压监视,电机控制器1002负责监视电池的电压水平。在预定义的闲置时间之后读取电压水平,预定义的闲置时间由电压读取闲置时间参数定义,电压读取闲置时间参数在按压“+”按钮1035或“-”按钮1037之后开始倒计时。电压读取闲置时间参数预设成15秒,但是这可以经由配置文件1106配置。如果闲置电压水平小于致动器最小电压阈值(在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且从配置文件1106或脚本1100读取),则停用致动器。对于低电压已经停用致动器后,电池电压必须变成比致动器最小电压阈值大一伏(1V),然后致动器才会被启用。如果闲置电压水平小于灯最小电压阈值(在配置文件1106或脚本1100中预设并且从配置文件1106或脚本1100读取),则将设置关灯位。对于低电压已经停用灯后,电池电压必须变成比灯最小电压阈值大一伏(1V),然后灯才会被启用。For battery voltage monitoring, motor controller 1002 is responsible for monitoring the battery voltage level. The voltage level is read after a predefined idle time, defined by the Voltage Read Idle Time parameter, which begins counting down after pressing the "+" button 1035 or the "-" button 1037. The Voltage Read Idle Time parameter is preset to 15 seconds, but this can be configured via configuration file 1106. If the idle voltage level is less than the actuator minimum voltage threshold (preset and read from configuration file 1106 or script 1100), the actuator is disabled. After the actuator has been disabled for low voltage, the battery voltage must exceed the actuator minimum voltage threshold by one volt (1V) before the actuator is enabled. If the idle voltage level is less than the light minimum voltage threshold (preset and read from configuration file 1106 or script 1100), the lights off position is set. After the low voltage has disabled the lamp, the battery voltage must become one volt (1V) above the lamp minimum voltage threshold before the lamp will be enabled.

电压区间:如果闲置电压>=VThresh3,则区间是3。如果闲置电压<VThresh3并且>=VThresh2,则区间是2。如果闲置电压<VThresh2并且>=VThresh1,则区间是1。如果闲置电压<VThresh1,则区间是0。Voltage Interval: If the idle voltage is >= VThresh3, the interval is 3. If the idle voltage is < VThresh3 and >= VThresh2, the interval is 2. If the idle voltage is < VThresh2 and >= VThresh1, the interval is 1. If the idle voltage is < VThresh1, the interval is 0.

数据记录Data Recording

将文本可读日志文件写入到存储器,诸如存储器102,或者写入到快闪存储卡,诸如连接到电机控制器的USB的存储棒、SD卡和/或压缩闪存卡。日志文件将包括特定条目,该条目记录错误代码的每次出现或清除。日志文件将在卧床操作期间包括特定条目,该条目每50毫秒(50ms)记录卧床状态。日志文件将在闲置周期期间以闲置日志时间控制的周期包括条目。电机控制器在数据日志文件中提供以下卧床状态字段:电池电压、A1、A2、D1、D2、C1、C2值、时戳、+按钮状态显示、-按钮状态显示、+按钮伸缩把手、-按钮伸缩把手、电机控制器错误代码、电机1电流、电机2电流、电机命令1、电机命令2、直接供电代码、电机状态、电池消息、A1速度、A2速度、电机1温度、电机2温度、控制器通道温度、控制器IC温度、故障旗标、电池温度和错误检测。A text-readable log file is written to a memory device, such as memory 102, or to a flash memory card, such as a USB memory stick, SD card, and/or Compact Flash card connected to the motor controller. The log file will include a specific entry that records each occurrence or clearing of an error code. The log file will include a specific entry during bed rest operation that records the bed rest status every 50 milliseconds (50 ms). The log file will include entries during idle periods at a period controlled by the idle log time. The motor controller provides the following bed rest status fields in the data log file: battery voltage, A1, A2, D1, D2, C1, C2 values, timestamp, + button status display, - button status display, + button telescoping handle, - button telescoping handle, motor controller error code, motor 1 current, motor 2 current, motor command 1, motor command 2, direct power code, motor status, battery message, A1 speed, A2 speed, motor 1 temperature, motor 2 temperature, controller channel temperature, controller IC temperature, fault flag, battery temperature, and error detection.

错误状况Error Conditions

电机控制器1002监视下面的错误/警告状况,并且采取错误的相关优先级类别指定的动作。下文提供的论述中还提供了检测到的“状况”的标示的“错误代码位”值以及“清除”动作(如果存在的话)。对于特定的错误可以列出“额外动作”,下文也予以论述。应了解,电机控制器1002在消息中设置相关错误代码位并且经由有线网络1008广播错误代码位。对于每个错误代码,向GUI 58提供相关错误图标51(图8)以向操作人员警告可能与相关错误代码有关的功能或安全问题。在一些实施例中,相关错误图标51可以通过颜色编码,其中高优先级错误代码用第一颜色(诸如红色)显示,所有其它错误代码可以用第二颜色(诸如黄色)显示。现在论述错误状况及其相关优先级。The motor controller 1002 monitors the following error/warning conditions and takes actions specified by the error's associated priority category. The discussion provided below also provides the "error code bit" value for the detected "condition" and the "clear" action (if any). Additional actions may be listed for specific errors, which are also discussed below. It should be understood that the motor controller 1002 sets the associated error code bit in the message and broadcasts the error code bit via the wired network 1008. For each error code, an associated error icon 51 ( FIG. 8 ) is provided to the GUI 58 to alert the operator to possible functional or safety issues associated with the associated error code. In some embodiments, the associated error icon 51 may be color-coded, with high-priority error codes displayed in a first color (such as red) and all other error codes displayed in a second color (such as yellow). Error conditions and their associated priorities will now be discussed.

错误状况-优先级类别:无。Error Condition - Priority Category: None.

-状况:低电池(电池电压小于配置文件1106或脚本1100中指定的电池区间1电压)=错误代码位0。清除:当电池电压变成高于电池区间1时清除。- Condition: Low Battery (battery voltage is less than the battery bin 1 voltage specified in configuration file 1106 or script 1100) = Error code bit 0. Cleared: Cleared when the battery voltage becomes higher than battery bin 1.

-状况:在电压读取闲置时间中的闲置之后电池低于致动器最小电压阈值=错误代码位1。额外动作:停用致动器。清除:当电池电压变成高于致动器最小电压+1V时清除。- Condition: Battery below actuator minimum voltage threshold after inactivity in voltage read inactivity time = Error code bit 1. Additional actions: Disable actuator. Clear: Cleared when battery voltage becomes above actuator minimum voltage + 1V.

-状况:在电压读取闲置时间中闲置之后电池低于灯最小电压阈值=错误代码位2。额外动作:设置关灯位清除:当电池电压变成高于灯最小电压+1V时清除。- Condition: Battery falls below lamp minimum voltage threshold after being idle for voltage read idle time = Error code bit 2. Additional actions: Set lights off bit Clear: Cleared when battery voltage becomes above lamp minimum voltage + 1V.

-状况:检测到在超过最大按钮按压中按钮打开(接通)=错误代码位3。清除:当检测到按钮关闭(断开)时清除。- Condition: Detected that the button is on (ON) in excess of the maximum button press = Error code bit 3. Cleared: Cleared when the button is detected to be off (OFF).

-状况:在调平操作期间在大于最大调平时间中|A1-A2|在水平操作范围以外=错误代码位4。清除:当支腿延伸变成水平时清除。- Condition: During leveling operation |A1-A2| outside horizontal operating range for more than maximum leveling time = Error code bit 4. Cleared: Cleared when outriggers are extended and become horizontal.

-状况:电池电荷检测故障(在设置了电池的充电位时在Charge+引脚上检测到零电压)=错误代码位5。- Condition: Battery Charge Detect Failure (zero voltage detected on Charge+ pin when battery's charge position is set) = Error Code Bit 5.

-状况:同时检测到“+”和“-”按钮=错误代码位6。额外动作:忽略这两个按钮(电机控制器1002将不命令支腿20、40延伸或缩回)。清除:当释放一个或两个按钮时清除。- Condition: "+" and "-" buttons detected simultaneously = Error code bit 6. Additional Actions: Ignore both buttons (motor controller 1002 will not command legs 20, 40 to extend or retract). Clear: Cleared when one or both buttons are released.

错误状况-优先级类别:低。错误处理-优先级类别:低,优先于所有无优先级错误类处理。Error condition - Priority category: Low. Error handling - Priority category: Low, takes precedence over all non-priority error class handling.

-状况:在Charge+上检测到不当的充电电压(在Charge+上>1.48mV;等于>44.1V充电器电压)=错误代码位16。清除:当Charge+上的电压<1.48mV时清除。- Condition: Improper charge voltage detected on Charge+ (>1.48mV on Charge+; equal to >44.1V charger voltage) = Error code bit 16. Clear: Cleared when voltage on Charge+ is <1.48mV.

-状况:卧床变成运输高度以上(在D1和D2都关闭时,A1或A2延伸超出运输高度)=错误代码位17。清除:当卧床不再高于运输高度时或在高优先级高于运输高度错误生效之后清除。- Condition: Bed becomes above transport height (A1 or A2 extends beyond transport height when both D1 and D2 are closed) = Error code bit 17. Cleared: Cleared when bed is no longer above transport height or after a high priority above transport height error becomes active.

-状况:充电故障(在未设置电池的充电和充满电位时在Charge+引脚上检测到非零电压)=错误代码位19。清除:当Charge+引脚的电压消失或者设置了电池的充电或充满电位时清除。- Condition: Charging Fault (non-zero voltage detected on Charge+ pin when the battery's charge or full potential is not set) = Error Code Bit 19. Cleared: Cleared when the voltage on the Charge+ pin disappears or the battery's charge or full potential is set.

-状况:电池高温(设置了电池充电器高温错误位)-错误代码位21。清除:当电池的高温错误位被清除时清除。- Condition: Battery High Temperature (Battery Charger High Temperature Error Bit is set) - Error Code Bit 21. Cleared: Cleared when the Battery's High Temperature Error Bit is cleared.

错误状况-优先级类别:中等。错误处理-优先级类别:中等优先于所有无和低优先级错误类别处理,并且引起螺线管致动器1036、1038的解除激活(例如在50毫秒内)并且在此错误状况清除之前防止致动。Error Condition - Priority Class: Medium. Error Handling - Priority Class: Medium overrides all None and Low priority error class handling and causes deactivation of the solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 (eg, within 50 milliseconds) and prevents actuation until this error condition clears.

-状况:检测到电机温度高于电机超温=错误代码位32。额外动作:在过热错误发生时,将继续监视和记录传感器温度。清除:当电机温度变成低于电机重启温度时,清除这个错误。- Condition: The motor temperature is detected to be above Motor Over Temperature = Error Code Bit 32. Additional Actions: The sensor temperature will continue to be monitored and recorded while the overtemperature error occurs. Clear: The error will be cleared when the motor temperature becomes below the motor restart temperature.

-状况:电机传感器断开=错误代码位33。清除:当检测到电机温度传感器时清除这个错误。- Condition: Motor sensor disconnected = Error code bit 33. Clear: This error is cleared when the motor temperature sensor is detected.

错误状况-优先级类别:高。错误处理-优先级类别:高优先于所有无、低和中等优先级错误类别处理,并且引起螺线管致动器1036、1038的解除激活(例如在50毫秒内)并且在此错误状况清除之前防止致动。电力循环将清除所有错误。转变成休眠模式将暂停所有警报。如果任一个电机中的电流超出40A不止500毫秒,则停用致动器。Error Condition - Priority Category: High. Error Handling - Priority Category: High overrides all None, Low, and Medium priority error handling and causes deactivation of solenoid actuators 1036, 1038 (e.g., within 50 milliseconds) and prevents actuation until the error condition clears. A power cycle will clear all errors. Transitioning to sleep mode will suspend all alarms. If the current in either motor exceeds 40A for more than 500 milliseconds, the actuator is disabled.

-状况:支腿移动状态速度错误(超出最大速度或低于最小速度)=错误代码位48。清除:在支腿速度错误逾时之后清除。- Condition: Outrigger movement state speed error (exceeds maximum speed or falls below minimum speed) = Error code bit 48. Clear: Cleared after outrigger speed error timeout.

-状况:支腿移动状态速度错误(低于最小速度)=错误代码位49。在按钮停用时间中停用致动器和-按钮。在这个时间期间显示错误图标。清除:如果+按钮被按压和/或在支腿速度错误逾时之后清除。- Condition: Outrigger Movement Status Speed Error (Below Minimum Speed) = Error Code Bit 49. Actuator and - button disabled during button deactivation time. Error icon displayed during this time. Cleared: Cleared if + button pressed and/or after outrigger speed error timeout.

-状况:角度传感器故障(A1或A2具有下面中的任一种情况:Ch1或Ch2电压在传感器的0.5V到4.5V的额定范围之外;或者Ch1+Ch2不是5V+/-0.5V)=错误代码位50。清除:在电压返回到预期范围之后清除。- Condition: Angle sensor fault (A1 or A2 has any of the following conditions: Ch1 or Ch2 voltage is outside the sensor's rated range of 0.5V to 4.5V; or Ch1+Ch2 is not 5V+/-0.5V) = Error code bit 50. Clear: Clears after voltage returns to expected range.

-状况:卧床已高于运输高度(A1或A2延伸超出运输高度,同时D1和D2都关闭)>30秒=错误代码位51。额外动作:不停用“-”按钮1037(允许致动器缩回,但不延伸)。清除:在卧床不再高于运输高度之后清除。- Condition: Couch already above transport height (A1 or A2 extended beyond transport height, with both D1 and D2 closed) > 30 seconds = Error code bit 51. Additional Action: Do not deactivate "-" button 1037 (allow actuator to retract, but not extend). Clear: Clears after the couch is no longer above transport height.

现在应当理解,本文所述的实施例可以用于通过将诸如患者支撑表面之类的支撑表面联接到支撑框架而运输各种体型的患者。例如,抬离式担架或恒温箱可以可移除地联接到支撑框架。因此,本文所述的实施例可以用于装载和运输从婴儿到肥胖症治疗患者的各种患者。另外,本文所述的实施例,操作人员通过如下方式可以将其装载到救护车上和/或从救护车上卸载:保持单一按钮以致动独立铰接的支腿(例如按压“-”按钮1037以将卧床装载到救护车上,或者按压“+”按钮1035以将卧床从救护车上卸载)。具体地说,卧床10可以诸如从操作人员控件接收输入信号。输入信号可以表示第一方向或第二方向(降低或升高)。当该信号表示第一方向时,该对装载端支腿和该对控制端支腿可以独立降低,或者当该信号表示第二方向时,该对装载端支腿和该对控制端支腿可以独立升高。It should now be understood that the embodiments described herein can be used to transport patients of various sizes by coupling a support surface, such as a patient support surface, to a support frame. For example, a lift-off stretcher or incubator can be removably coupled to the support frame. Thus, the embodiments described herein can be used to load and transport a variety of patients, from infants to bariatric patients. Furthermore, the embodiments described herein allow an operator to load and/or unload the cot onto and/or from an ambulance by pressing a single button to actuate the independently articulated legs (e.g., pressing the "-" button 1037 to load the cot onto an ambulance, or pressing the "+" button 1035 to unload the cot from an ambulance). Specifically, the cot 10 can receive an input signal, such as from an operator control. The input signal can indicate a first direction or a second direction (lowering or raising). When the signal indicates the first direction, the pair of loading-end legs and the pair of control-end legs can be lowered independently, or when the signal indicates the second direction, the pair of loading-end legs and the pair of control-end legs can be raised independently.

还要注意,比如“优选地”、“总体上”、“通常”和“一般”之类词语在本文中不用于限制所要求的实施例的范围、或暗示某些特征对于所要求的实施例的结构或功能是至关重要的、必需的或者甚至是重要的。而是,这些词语只是用来强调替代或额外的特征,本发明的特定实施例中可以使用或者可以不使用这些特征。It is also noted that words such as "preferably," "generally," "typically," and "generally" are not used herein to limit the scope of the claimed embodiments, or to imply that certain features are critical, required, or even essential to the structure or function of the claimed embodiments. Rather, these words are simply used to highlight alternative or additional features that may or may not be utilized in a particular embodiment of the present invention.

出于描述和限定本发明的目的,另外请注意,本文中使用“基本上”这个词语来表示任何定量比较、值、测量值或其它表示形式可能具有的不确定程度。本文中还使用“基本上”这个词语表示在不导致在所关注的主题的基本功能变化的情况下,定量表示可从规定的参考变化的程度。For the purposes of describing and defining the present invention, please also note that the word "substantially" is used herein to represent the degree of uncertainty that may be associated with any quantitative comparison, value, measurement, or other representation. The word "substantially" is also utilized herein to represent the degree by which a quantitative representation may vary from a stated reference without resulting in a change in the basic function of the subject matter at issue.

在参照具体实施例之后,很明显,在不脱离所附权利要求书限定的本发明的范围的前提下,可能做出修改和变化。更具体来说,虽然本文中指出本发明的一些方面是优选的或特别有利的,但是本发明希望不限于任何具体实施例的这些优选方面。After reference to the specific embodiments, it will be apparent that modifications and variations are possible without departing from the scope of the invention as defined in the appended claims. More specifically, although some aspects of the invention are indicated herein as being preferred or particularly advantageous, the invention is not intended to be limited to these preferred aspects of any specific embodiment.

Claims (15)

1.一种电动救护车卧床,用于在表面上方运输患者,包括:1. An electric ambulance bed for transporting a patient above a surface, comprising: 支撑框架;Supporting framework; 四个支腿,每个支腿具有用于在所述表面上支撑所述卧床的转轮;Four legs, each leg having a caster for supporting the bed on the surface; 卧床致动系统的致动器,所述致动器将所述支撑框架与一对所述支腿互连,并且相对于每个所述支腿的所述转轮改变所述支撑框架的高度;以及An actuator for a bed actuation system, the actuator interconnecting the support frame with a pair of legs and changing the height of the support frame relative to the wheels of each leg; and 卧床控制系统,其可操作地连接到所述卧床致动系统以控制所述卧床致动系统的激活,并且检测所述致动器相对于所述支撑框架处在第一方位,其中所述第一方位远离第二方位,并且将所述致动器的远离每个转轮的末端定位成更接近所述支撑框架,以及特定信号的存在,所述信号请求相对于每个所述支腿的所述转轮改变所述支撑框架的高度,以使得所述卧床致动系统以第一速度相对于所述支撑框架移动该对所述支腿,所述第一速度不同于当所述致动器的所述末端处在所述第二方位时所述卧床致动系统相对于所述支撑框架移动该对所述支腿的第二速度。A bed-staying control system operatively connected to the bed-staying actuation system to control the activation of the bed-staying actuation system, and detecting that the actuator is in a first orientation relative to the support frame, wherein the first orientation is away from a second orientation, and positioning the end of the actuator away from each wheel closer to the support frame, and the presence of a specific signal requesting a change in the height of the support frame relative to the wheel of each of the outriggers, such that the bed-staying actuation system moves the pair of outriggers relative to the support frame at a first speed, the first speed being different from a second speed at which the bed-staying actuation system moves the pair of outriggers relative to the support frame when the end of the actuator is in the second orientation. 2.根据权利要求1所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统包括至少一个控制器、传感器、用户显示单元、电池单元和有线通信网络,所述有线通信网络被配置成在所述至少一个控制器、传感器、所述用户显示单元和所述电池单元之间传送消息。2. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 1, wherein the bed control system includes at least one controller, a sensor, a user display unit, a battery unit, and a wired communication network, the wired communication network being configured to transmit messages between the at least one controller, the sensor, the user display unit, and the battery unit. 3.根据权利要求2所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述有线通信网络是选自控制器区域网络(CAN)、LONWorks网络、LIN网络、RS-232网络、Firewire网络和DeviceNet网络。3. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 2, wherein the wired communication network is selected from Controller Area Network (CAN), LONWorks network, LIN network, RS-232 network, Firewire network and DeviceNet network. 4.根据权利要求2所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述电池单元是与电池组集成的电池管理系统,所述电池组向所述卧床提供便携式电力,其中所述电池管理系统控制所述电池组的充电和放电,并且经由所述有线通信网络与所述至少一个控制器通信。4. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 2, wherein the battery unit is a battery management system integrated with a battery pack that provides portable power to the bed, wherein the battery management system controls the charging and discharging of the battery pack and communicates with the at least one controller via the wired communication network. 5.根据权利要求2所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述至少一个控制器是第一控制器,并且所述卧床控制系统包括第二控制器,其中所述第一控制器是用于控制所述支撑框架相对于每个转轮的升高和降低的电机控制器,并且所述第二控制器是用于从操作人员接收输入并且向操作人员提供输出的图形用户界面控制器。5. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 2, wherein the at least one controller is a first controller, and the bed control system includes a second controller, wherein the first controller is a motor controller for controlling the raising and lowering of the support frame relative to each wheel, and the second controller is a graphical user interface controller for receiving input from and providing output to the operator. 6.根据权利要求5所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统包括第三控制器,其选自用于发送和接收无线通信的无线控制器、用于控制向所述电动救护车卧床的所有电动组件供电的电池的电池控制器及其组合。6. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 5, wherein the bed control system includes a third controller selected from a wireless controller for transmitting and receiving wireless communications, a battery controller for controlling the power supply of batteries to all electric components of the electric ambulance bed, and combinations thereof. 7.根据权利要求5所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述电机控制器通过程序逻辑脚本经过编程,以控制所述卧床致动系统的激活从而相对于所述支腿的每个转轮升高和降低所述支撑框架。7. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 5, wherein the motor controller is programmed via a program logic script to control the activation of the bed actuation system to raise and lower the support frame relative to each wheel of the outriggers. 8.根据权利要求1所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统包括手动地可操作的用户界面装置,用于向所述卧床控制系统提供请求相对于每个所述支腿的所述转轮改变所述支撑框架的高度的信号;并且其中所述卧床控制系统被配置成响应于检测到所述致动器的所述末端处在所述第二方位并且响应于存在所述信号而经由手动操作所述用户界面装置以最大电力移动支腿。8. The electric ambulance bed of claim 1, wherein the bed control system includes a manually operable user interface device for providing the bed control system with a signal requesting a change in the height of the support frame relative to the wheels of each of the outriggers; and wherein the bed control system is configured to move the outriggers with maximum power via manual operation of the user interface device in response to detecting that the end of the actuator is in the second orientation and in response to the presence of the signal. 9.根据权利要求1所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统包括手动地可操作的用户界面装置,用于向所述卧床控制系统提供请求相对于每个所述支腿的所述转轮改变所述支撑框架的高度的信号,所述致动器是第一致动器,该对所述支腿是第一对所述支腿,其中所述第一致动器将所述第一对支腿与所述支撑框架互连,并且其中所述卧床致动系统包括第二致动器,所述第二致动器将第二对所述支腿与所述支撑框架互连,所述卧床致动系统被配置成经由所述第一致动器和所述第二致动器的独立操作而相对于每个所述支腿的所述转轮改变所述支撑框架的高度,并且其中所述卧床致动系统将在所述第一致动器的所述末端处于所述第一方位时,响应于存在所述信号,经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,通过所述第一致动器和所述第二致动器的所述独立操作,借此在所述卧床的装载端与控制端之间均衡所述支撑框架的高度。9. The electric ambulance bed of claim 1, wherein the bed control system includes a manually operable user interface device for providing the bed control system with a signal requesting a change in the height of the support frame relative to the wheels of each of the outriggers, the actuator being a first actuator, the pair of outriggers being a first pair of outriggers, wherein the first actuator interconnects the first pair of outriggers with the support frame, and wherein the bed actuation system includes a second actuator interconnecting a second pair of outriggers with the support frame, the bed actuation system being configured to change the height of the support frame relative to the wheels of each of the outriggers via independent operation of the first actuator and the second actuator, and wherein the bed actuation system, in response to the presence of the signal, by manually operating the user interface device, thereby balancing the height of the support frame between the loading end and the control end of the bed through the independent operation of the first actuator and the second actuator, when the end of the first actuator is in the first orientation. 10.根据权利要求9所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统进一步包括模式选择按钮,在模式选择按钮中循环通过多个直接供电模式并且从多个直接供电模式中选择一个直接供电模式,并且其中选择直接供电模式使所述卧床致动系统在所述卧床控制系统的显示器上以图形方式显示所述直接供电模式的选择,并且响应于存在所述信号,经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,不通过独立操作所述第一致动器和所述第二致动器而在所述卧床的所述装载端与所述控制端之间均衡所述支撑框架的高度。10. The electric ambulance bed of claim 9, wherein the bed control system further includes a mode selection button, which cycles through a plurality of direct power supply modes and selects one of the plurality of direct power supply modes, wherein selecting the direct power supply mode causes the bed actuation system to graphically display the selection of the direct power supply mode on a display of the bed control system, and in response to the presence of the signal, the height of the support frame is balanced between the loading end and the control end of the bed by manually operating the user interface device without independently operating the first actuator and the second actuator. 11.根据权利要求10所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述直接供电模式之一是两种支腿直接供电模式,通过选择该模式,使得所述卧床控制系统响应于存在所述信号经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,借此改变在所述装载端和所述控制端两处对所述支撑框架的评估。11. The electric ambulance bed of claim 10, wherein one of the direct power supply modes is a two-leg direct power supply mode, by selecting the mode, causing the bed control system to respond to the presence of the signal by manually operating the user interface device, thereby changing the evaluation of the support frame at both the loading end and the control end. 12.根据权利要求11所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述直接供电模式中的另一种是仅装载端支腿直接供电模式,通过选择该模式,使得所述卧床控制系统响应于存在所述信号,经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,借此仅仅改变在所述装载端处对所述支撑框架的评估。12. The electric ambulance bed of claim 11, wherein another of the direct power supply modes is a direct power supply mode for the loading end outriggers only, by selecting this mode, causing the bed control system to respond to the presence of the signal by manually operating the user interface device, thereby changing only the evaluation of the support frame at the loading end. 13.根据权利要求12所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述直接供电模式中的又另一种是仅控制端支腿直接供电模式,通过选择该模式,使得所述卧床控制系统响应于存在所述信号,经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,借此仅仅改变在所述控制端处对所述支撑框架的评估。13. The electric ambulance bed according to claim 12, wherein another of the direct power supply modes is a control-end outrigger direct power supply mode, by selecting this mode, causing the bed control system to respond to the presence of the signal by manually operating the user interface device, thereby changing only the evaluation of the support frame at the control end. 14.根据权利要求13所述的电动救护车卧床,其中所述卧床控制系统返回正常操作状态,在正常操作状态中,所述卧床控制系统响应于在选择所述直接供电模式之后开始的倒计时器到期之后存在所述信号,以及在所述倒计时器到期之前不存在所述信号,经由手动操作所述用户界面装置,通过独立操作所述第一致动器和所述第二致动器,借此在所述卧床的所述装载端与所述控制端之间均衡所述支撑框架的高度。14. The electric ambulance bed of claim 13, wherein the bed control system returns to a normal operating state, in which the bed control system responds to the presence of the signal after a countdown timer that begins after the selection of the direct power supply mode expires, and the absence of the signal before the countdown timer expires, by manually operating the user interface device, thereby balancing the height of the support frame between the loading end and the control end of the bed by independently operating the first actuator and the second actuator. 15.一种在表面上方运输患者的方法,其包括使用根据权利要求1所述的电动救护车卧床。15. A method of transporting a patient above a surface, comprising using an electric ambulance bed as described in claim 1.
HK17113683.6A 2014-11-11 2015-02-25 Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system HK1240070B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/538,164 2014-11-11

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
HK1240070A1 HK1240070A1 (en) 2018-05-18
HK1240070B true HK1240070B (en) 2019-09-06

Family

ID=

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN106999328B (en) Electric ambulance bed rest with automatic bed rest control system
JP2020014876A (en) Method and system for automatic articulated cot
HK1240070B (en) Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system
HK40000806A (en) Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system
HK1240070A1 (en) Powered ambulance cot with an automated cot control system